1
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION
LIMITED
TENDER NO. 6000061 –HD-11350 FOR STANDING WORKS
CONTRACT FOR MODERNISATION / CONSTRUCTION OF
RETAIL OUTLETS UNDER VASHI REGION
UNPRICED BID
(TECHNO - COMMERCIAL BID)
____________________________________________________________
OFFICE OF THE GENERAL MANAGER - WEST ZONE
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED
PURCHASE DEPT., 2 ND FLOOR, R & C BUILDING,
J.J. ROAD, BYCULLA, MUMBAI -400008
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
----------
BRIEF TO BIDDERS
----------
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT (FORM-A)
----------
EXCEPTIONS AND DEVIATIONS (FORM-B)
----------
BIDDER QUALIFICATION CRITERION (FORM-C)
----------
PRESENT COMMITMENTS (FORM-D)
----------
DETAILS OF PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENTS
(FORM-E)
----------
FINANCIAL DETAILS (FORM-F)
----------
DECLARATION NON BLACKLISTED /NON BANNED PARTY ----------(FORM- G)
CHECK LIST FOR SUBMISSION OF BID (FORM-H)
-------
SECTION – I
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-----
SECTION – II
SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-----
SECTION – III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND
TESTING OF MATERIALS
----
SECTION – IV
LIST OF APPROVED BRANDS / MAKES
----
SECTION – V
STANDARD DRAWINGS
----
BASE RATE ATTACHMENT
----
3
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED
(A Government of India Enterprise)
Office of the General Manager – West Zone
R & C Building Byculla, Mumbai.
NOTICE INVITING TENDER (DOMESTIC COMPETITVE BIDDING)
FOR
STANDING WORKS CONTRACT FOR MODERNISATION / CONSTRUCTION
OF RETAIL OUTLETS IN VASHI REGION`
TENDER No. : 6000061 –HD-11350
1.
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (A Govt. of India
Enterprise) proposes to modernize/construct retail outlets in VASHI
Region.District covered under VASHI region are : THANE,RAIGAD & NASIK.
Total value of the tendered jobs is Rs. 400 Lacs.
2.
HPCL invites sealed bids under single stage two bid system (Part I: Techno
commercial & Part II: Priced part) from competitive bidders with sound technical
and financial capabilities fulfilling the qualifying requirements stated below for
modernization of retail outlets in VASHI Regional office.
3.
Brief scope of work involves installation and testing of MS underground tanks,
land development, WBM, Compound wall, Chain link fencing, VDRCC, Paver
block driveways, Asphalted driveways, construction of building, fabrication and
erection of structural canopies, instrumentation, electrical and other allied works.
4.
The salient features of the tender document are as follows:
EARNEST
MONEY
DEPOSIT
(EMD)
TENDER
FEE
RS. 2 LACS.
Rs.1000/-
SALE PERIOD
FOR
OBTAINING
TENDER
DOCUMENT
BY BIDDER
03.10.06
to
10.11.06
PRE BID MEETING
DATE, TIME &
VENUE
LAST DATE & TIME
FOR RECEIPT OF
BIDS
Opening of
Unpriced
Bids
14.30 HRS. on 14.11.06
AT VASHI Regional
Office ,D99/500,HPCL
Terminal, TTC
Industrial Area, MIDC ,
Turbhe, Vashi ,Navi
Mumbai- 400705
11.00 HRS on
20.11.06
11.30 HRS on
20.11.06
4
5.
A set of tender documents (Non-Transferable) may be purchased on any working
day (Monday to Friday) between 1030 Hrs to 1230 Hrs and from 1430 Hrs to 1600
Hr s ,
during the sale period from Purchase Department-Retail SBU,
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED, R&C Building,
Byculla, Mumbai by paying the prescribed tender fee in the form of crossed
demand draft only, in
favour of “HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM
CORPORATION LIMITED, MUMBAI” from any Nationalised/Scheduled
Bank( other than Cooperative Bank.). The tender documents can be downloaded
from www. hindustanpetroleum.com. Tender documents downloaded from
website should be submitted along with the prescribed tender fee in the form of
crossed demand draft only, in favour of “HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM
CORPORATION LIMITED, MUMBAI” from any Nationalised/Scheduled
Bank( other than Cooperative Bank.). Tender documents ,which are downloaded
from website but not submitted with prescribed tender fee, mentioned above
,shall be rejected. Request for application forms by post will not be entertained.
6.
Sealed bids shall be addressed to Sr. Manager-Purchase-Retail SBU
HINDUSTAN CORPORATION LIMITED R & C Building, Byculla,
Mumbai. Bids being delivered by hand shall be put in the separate tender box
provided at the reception section. Techno commercial part shall be opened at
11.30 Hrs on the last date for submission of bids in the presence of authorised
representatives of the attending bidders. Time and date for opening of price bids
shall be notified to the qualified and acceptable bidders at a later date.
7.
QUALIFICATION CRITERIA: Agencies intending to participate shall fulfill the
following requirements:
EXPERIENCE CRITERIA
Bidder should have completed similar jobs
(as per the scope of the job mentioned
under point no. 3 above) of single Work
Order value not less than Rs.1.92 crores OR
similar jobs of two Work Orders each value
less than order value not less than Rs. 1.2
Crores OR similar jobs of three work
orders each value not less than 0.96 Crores
in last seven years (i.e. from Aug. 1999 to
July 2006)
8.
FINANCIAL CRITERIA
Average Annual turnover should be
minimum of Rs. 72 Lacs for the last
three years ending with 2004-05(
Financial year ending with 31st March.
Bidder shall furnish documentary evidence i.e., copies of work orders, completion
certificates, audited balance sheets and Profit & Loss account statements in the
first instance itself in support of their fulfilling the qualifying requirements as
mentioned under point no. 8 above. HPCL reserve the right to complete the
5
evaluation based on the details furnished in original bid without seeking any
additional information.
9.
HPCL shall not be responsible for any expense incurred by bidders in connection
with the preparation and delivery of their bids, including expenses incurred during
bidding.
10.
Bids from Consortium shall not be accepted. Telex / Telegraphic / Fax / Email
bids shall not be accepted. Late / Delayed tenders shall be rejected and
representative of such bidder shall not be allowed to attend the bid opening.
11.
Bids from registered companies shall be accepted including having foreign
collaboration provided the same are registered with the Indian Registrar of
companies prior to date of this tender and copies of registered joint
ventures(JVs)/companies having been already formed is submitted. Bids from the
companies including having foreign collaboration, which are not registered with
Indian Registrar of Companies ,prior to date of the tender will be rejected.
12.
HPCL reserves the rights to reject any or all bids without assigning any reason.
13.
Central Public Sector Enterprises /SSI units registered with NSIC (certified copy
required)shall be extended purchase preference as per government guidelines in
force from time to time. These units are also exempted from payment of Tender
document cost ,Earnest Money Deposit and Security Deposit.
14.
Parties who have been blacklisted/put on holiday list or parties in respect of
whom the action for blacklisting and holiday listing has been initiated by
HPCL/any Government/ Quasi Government Agencies or PSUs, shall not be
considered for award of job. The bidder should give a written declaration
regarding the same ,as per format enclosed with tender documents.
15.
HPCL reserves right to inspect or depute any third party inspection agency for
inspection of the premises and factory of the vendor at any time before
finalization of purchase order or at a later stage at its sole discretion.
16.
In case of any clarifications, party may contact
Sr. Manager – Purchase, Retail
SBU, HPCL West Zone office, Mumbai .
Telephone No. : 022- 23702615 (direct)/23719461 ext.2012
Fax No.: 022- 23727353/23782496
.
CHIEF MANAGER-RETAIL UPGRADATION
WEST ZONE, HPCL.
6
BRIEF TO BIDDERS
This standing works contract is for modernization of Retail Outlets / Construction of New
Retail outlets in VASHI Regional Office. The scope of work includes installation and
testing of MS underground tanks, land development, WBM, Compound wall, Chain link
fencing, VDRCC, Paver block driveways, Asphalted driveways, construction of
building, instrumentation, electrical and other allied works.
1.
Approximate value of the work to be carried out in one year is Rs. 4 crores. . The
tenderer will be required to carry out work in Retail Outlets at different locations.
Each job at individual retail outlet will be of Rs. 20 lakhs and above.
2.
Selection of Vendors : The job shall be finalised basis the overall lowest offer
received . 2 party shall be required for the subject job.
The job shall be awarded to two parties in the ratio of 60:40 in the order of their
original ranking, subject to matching of our counter offered L 1 rates by L2
bidder.L1 shall be awarded 60% job & L2 shall be awarded 40% job, subject to
matching of our counter offered L1 rates.
In case, L2 party does not agree to match L1 rates, then L1 shall be awarded 60%
job & balance 40% job will be retendered through limited tender.
In case two or more parties become L1 , then entire job will be equally divided
among all L- 1 parties.
In case two or more parties become L2, then 60% job will be awarded to L1
party. Counter offer shall be extended for matching L1 rates to all L2 bidders. 40
% job shall be equally divided among L2 parties accepting our counter offered
rates.
3.
CALL UP ORDERS :Based upon the approved rates through this tender
,purchase order/s will be placed as per the clause no.2 mentioned above.
Separate call up orders
will be issued
for each site from the respective
regional office to the parties on whom purchase orders are placed . Scope of job
& completion period for each site will be specified in such call up order.
4.
COMPLETION PERIOD : As mentioned above in clause no.3, completion
period shall be specified in the Call Up Order issued for each site depending
upon the scope & quantum of the job at that site. Generally following completion
time from the date of issuance of such letter will be followed by HPCL :
.
i.
Major Rebuild involving construction of building, canopy, driveway and allied
jobs - 4 months.
7
ii.
iii.
Sales building, murrum filling, WBM, Driveway, pump installation and allied
works at new sites / Existing sites – 3 months.
Canopy / Driveway / Tank installation and allied jobs – 3 months.
iv.
Only canopy or only driveway with pump island, installation of tanks and allied
jobs – 2 months.
5.
BASE RATE :
HPCL’s base rates are specified in the tender. These rates are inclusive of all the
applicable taxes ,levies, material cost, workmanship ,transportation costs etc.
GENERAL:
1.
Tenderers are requested to carefully study all the documents / annexures
and understand the conditions, specifications, drawings etc., before
quoting their rates. In case of doubt, written clarifications should be
obtained, but this shall not be a justification for late submission of the bid
or request for extension of due date. Offers should strictly be in
accordance with the tender terms & conditions and our specifications.
2.
All the enclosed Tender documents along with the covering letter will form
part of the tender.
Tenderers shall return the completed set duly signed and stamped
at the end of each page in token of having read, understood and
accepted the conditions.
All entries in the documents shall be written in permanent ink or
typewritten and there shall be no erasures or over writing. Corrections if
any, should be attested under the full signature/s of the Tenderer.
When person signing the documents is not the sole proprietor or Partner
,or Director of the firm, original power of Attorney or a notary certified copy
thereof authorising such person to act and sign on behalf of the tenderer
shall also be enclosed.
It shall be understood that every endeavour has been made to avoid
errors which can materially affect the basis of the tender and the
successful Tenderer shall take upon himself and provide for risk of any
error which may subsequently be discovered and shall make no
subsequent claim on account thereof.
Tenderers shall submit their offers without any deviations or counter
conditions. However, if tenderer insist upon deviations / counter
8
conditions, bids may be liable to be rejected and no further
correspondences on this issue by the tenderer will be entertained.
Tenderer’s signature on the documents is considered as total acceptance
of the terms & conditions and hence “acceptance” need not be mentioned
on each paper of the offer.
6.
EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD) :
The tenderers shall submit an Earnest Money Deposit of Rs.2.0 Lakh
( Rupees Two Lakh only) by crossed account payee Demand Draft
drawn on any Nationalised/Scheduled bank (other than co-operative bank)
in favour of “HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED”
payable at Mumbai. EMD should be submitted along with the
Unpriced Bid only and Unpriced bids received without EMD shall
be rejected.
Bank guarantee as per general terms and conditions in lieu of EMD may
be submitted in prescribed format.
Cheques, cash, Money Orders, Fixed deposit Receipts etc. towards EMD
are not acceptable. Similarly, request for adjustment against any
previously deposited EMD / Pending Dues / Bills / Security Deposits of
other contracts etc. will not be accepted towards EMD.
7.
Exemption from EMD:
Central Public Sector Enterprises are exempted from payment of EMD.
* The proof that the tenderer is PSE must be submitted alongwith
Technical-Bid or else their offer is liable to be rejected.
Units registered with National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC)
are exempted from payment of EMD, subject to :
The unit being registered with NSIC for the item tendered
.Registration certificate being valid as on date of quotation.
Techno commercial Bid is accompanied by a photocopy of valid
NSIC Registration Certificate / Review Certificate duly attested
by a gazetted officer / notarised.
Photocopy of application for registration as NSIC or for renewal of
NSIC will not be acceptable. Such offers will be treated as offers
received without EMD.
Registration with DGS&D will not entitle the Tenderer to claim
9
exemption from payment of EMD.
The EMD is liable to be forfeited, in the event of :
i.
Withdrawal of offers during the validity period of the offer. (Refer item
no. 16)
ii.
Non–acceptance of Orders, if and when placed.
iii. Non-confirmation of acceptance of Orders, within the stipulated time
after placement of orders.
iv. Any unilateral revision in the offer made by the tenderer during the
validity of the offer.
v.
Non-execution of agreement after acceptance of the order for any
reason whatsoever.
vi. Non payment of Security Deposit, against LOIs / POs within the
stipulated period of 15 days from date of placement of LOIs / POs,
whichever is earlier.
EMD will be refunded to all the unsuccessful tenderers after finalisation of
the Tender. For successful tenderers, refund will be made only on
payment of Security Deposit against LOI / PO, as placed. EMD shall not
bear any interest and shall be refunded by Cheque. While claiming refund,
the original Cash Receipt issued by HPCL must be surrendered.
8.
ACCEPTANCE OF THE OFFER BY THE CORPORATION:
Incomplete or conditional submissions, and those with deviations /
subjective or counter conditions / quantity restrictions or those not
accompanied by the requisite documents shall be liable to be rejected and
no further correspondence / enquiries on this issue by the tenderer shall
be entertained.
(b)
Any terms and conditions attached / printed overleaf of the Tenderer's
offer will not be binding on HPCL.
The Corporation is not bound to accept the lowest offer and reserve the
right to reject any and / or every tender without assigning any reason
whatsoever and / or place order on one or more tenderers and / or carry
out negotiations with any tenderer in the manner considered appropriate
by the Corporation. Corporation also reserves the right to reject any Un-
10
workable offer. Purchase / price preference as applicable would be given
to Central Public Sector Enterprises/NSIC registered vendor as per
directives of Government of India, in vogue from time to time. Tenderers
may have to attend the concerned office of the Corporation for
negotiations / clarifications if required at their own cost, in respect of their
quotations without any commitment from the Corporation.
9.
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
A.
UNPRICED BID ( TECHNO COMMERCIAL BID) :
It shall contain the following a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Tender documents duly filled in, signed & stamped.
Copy of Audited Balance Sheets and statements of P&L A/cs for the years
2003-04, 2004-05 and 2005-06.
Certified copy of Partnership Deed / Memorandum & Articles of
Association & Certificate of Registration with the Registrar of Companies.
Certified copies of Registration Certificate under NSIC, works contract tax.
Organogram.
Compliance Requirement
Exceptions and Deviations
Bidder Qualification Criterion
Present Commitments
Details of Proposed Construction Equipments
Financial Details
Solvency certificate.
Declaration regarding non blacklisted/non banned party
EMD in the form of Demand Draft/Bank Guarantee in original or Certificate
for exemption (if applicable) to be enclosed.
Signed & stamped copy of base rate attachment.
Prices shall not be mentioned in un-priced bid. Un-priced bid containing
prices shall be summarily rejected.
The tenderer should sign and stamp each and every page of the tender
documents as well as supporting documents submitted with the offer. The
supporting documents should be serially numbered and total number of
pages submitted, should be indicated in the covering letter.
10.
PRICE BID :
1. HPCL’s base rates are specified in the tender. These rates are
inclusive of all the applicable taxes ,levies, material cost, workmanship
,transportation costs etc.
11
Bidders are requested not to quote any rates on the base rate
attachment
to avoid rejection. Separate Price Bid Format is
enclosed for quoting percentage rates as per clause no. 2 mentioned
below.
2..Parties have to quote overall percentage rate i.e. +/-/at par (plus /
minus/ at par ) with respect to base rates offered in attached schedule of
rates. The % rates quoted by the bidder shall be applicable to base
rates of all the items mentioned in the tender. These percentage rates
quoted above should be inclusive of all the applicable taxes ,levies,
material cost, workmanship ,transportation costs etc.
Tender shall be disqualified in following cases :
a.. If the bidder quotes different % rates for different items
AND/OR
b. If the bidder quotes more than ONE rate using above format
AND /OR
c.. If the bidder quotes rate using any format other than the price bid
format enclosed herewith the tender documents.
The Price Bid shall be kept in the separate envelope provided by us.
The covers should be sealed and the name of the tenderer should be
clearly indicated on the cover of Price Bid. Price Bid shall be in line with
the Terms & Conditions of the tender. Price bid shall not contain any thing
else other than the percentage rate in the given format. No terms and
conditions or exception/deviation are permitted to be included in price bid.
Price Bid with counter condition is liable to be rejected unless the same is
withdrawn during Technical evaluation.
Both the envelopes separately containing sealed Un-priced Bid and
Price Bid shall be kept in a sealed envelope.
11. Tender documents shall be submitted in sealed envelopes and sent by
registered Post / Courier so as to reach the concerned authority or
dropped in the tender box as mentioned in the tender forms, before the
closing due date / time.
12.
Bids submitted after the due date & time and those not in the format or not
in conformity with the prescribed terms and conditions or specifications
shall be summarily rejected and no further correspondence / enquiries
shall be entertained on the issue. No responsibility shall be taken by the
Corporation for documents received late due to postal delay and no claims
on this account shall be entertained.
12
13.
The offer shall be valid for a period of six months from the date of opening
of the un-priced bid. In case of successful tenderers, the finalised rate
shall remain valid till conclusion of the contract in all respects.
14.
Courts in the city of MUMBAI alone shall have jurisdiction to entertain any
application or other proceedings in respect of anything arising under this
tender either before or after or during the finalisation of the tender.
Corporation reserves the right to take action as deemed fit which is inclusive of
putting the manufacturer under suspension / holiday, in case of withdrawal of
Offer at any stage, non-acceptance of LOI / PO or any other breach of Tender
terms and conditions.
For any queries / clarifications regarding the tender, the parties may contact:
Sr. Manager – Purchase, Retail SBU, HPCL West Zone office, Mumbai .
Telephone No. : 022- 23702615 (direct)/23719461 ext.2012 & Fax No.: 02223727353/23782496
13
FORM-A
COMPLIANCE TO BID REQUIREMENT
We hereby agree to fully comply with, abide by and accept without variation, deviation
or reservation all technical, commercial and other conditions whatsoever of the Bidding
Documents and Addendum to the Bidding Documents for subject work issued by
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited.
We hereby further confirm terms and conditions mentioned in our un-priced as well as
priced part shall not be recognised and shall be treated as null and void.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER :
___________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
___________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
___________________
NOTE:
In the event of bidder’s not complying with all technical, commercial
and other conditions as stipulated in the bidding document, bidder
should fill up FORM-B [EXCEPTIONS AND DEVIATIONS] instead
of FORM-A.
14
FORM-B
EXCEPTION AND DEVIATIONS
S.NO.
REF OF BID DOCUMENT
PAGE NO.
NOTE:
SUBJECT
DEVIATIONS
CLAUSE NO.
This shall be submitted separately for Commercial & Technical Sections.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER :
___________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
___________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
___________________
15
FORM-C
BIDDER QUALIFICATION CRITERION
QUALIFICATION EXPERIENCE DURING LAST 24 MONTHS
SR. DESCRIPTION
NO.
POSTAL ADDRESS OF
CLIENT & NAME OF
OFFICER IN CHARGE
CONTRACT
VALUE
STARTING
DATE
SCHEDULED
COMPLETION
DATE
ACTUAL
COMPLETION
DATE
Bidder to furnish detailed work order(s) and corresponding completion certificate(s) of the similar work(s)
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
:
___________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
___________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
___________________
DATE AND
REFERENCE
OF
COMPLETION
CERTIFICATES
16
FORM-D
PRESENT COMMITMENTS
SR.
NO .
(I)
FULL POSTAL
ADDRESS OF
CLIENT & NAME
OF OFFICER IN
CHARGE
DESCRIPTION
OF THE WORK
VALUE OF
CONTRACT
DATE OF
COMMENCEMENT
OF WORK
Bidder to furnish detailed work order(s)
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER :
___________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
___________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
___________________
SCHEDULED
COMPLETION
PERIOD
% AGE
COMP.AS
ON DATE
EXPECTED
DATE OF
COMPLETION
REMARKS
17
FORM-E
DETAILS OF PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENTS
The bidder shall submit herein details of equipment, tools, tackles proposed to be deployed for this work and shall indicate in each
case whether the same (A) owned by bidder and available for use of this Contract, (B) anticipated to be hired (C) anticipated to be
purchased. In case of (A), present location shall be stated. In case of (B) and (C), name and location of lending agency or supplier
shall be stated.
ITEM TO BE DESCRIPTION
DEPLOYED
MAKE, MODEL
NUMBERS
YEAR
OF CATEGORY (A) OR LOCATION
MANUFACTURE (B) OR (C) ABOVE
REMARKS
Bidder agrees to augment the above proposed list with additional number/categories of equipment, tools and tackles, if required and as
per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge, to complete the work within the completion time schedule and quoted price.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER:
___________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
___________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
___________________
18
FORM-F
FINANCIAL DETAILS
The bidder shall indicate herein his annual turnover during preceding 3 years based on the
audited balance sheet/ profit & loss account statement.
Financial Year
Annual Turnover (Rs.)
Net worth
(Rs.)
2005-2006
2004-2005
2003-2004
Note:
1.
Copies of audited balance sheets with Profit & Loss account statement for last 3 years
are enclosed along with the bid.
2.
Bidder shall work out Net worth on following basis:
Net worth: Reserve + Capital – Accumulated loss
3.
All relevant pages of Audited Balance Sheets / Profit and Loss Account are flag
marked and relevant figures are highlighted for easy identification.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
:
________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
________________
19
FORM-G
DECLARATION
We hereby declare that at no point of time our firm have been blacklisted by HPCL/Any Govt.
Organisation/ Quasi Government Agencies or Public Sector Undertaking for breach of
contract. In case the same is found at a later date, we under take to accept cancellation of the
order at any point of time . If the same is detected at a later stage , We shall have no claim
what so ever in respect of the tender and shall be bound by the decision of HPCL.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
:
________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
________________
20
FORM-H
CHECK LIST FOR SUBMISSION OF BID
Bidder is requested to fill this check list and ensure that all details/ documents have been
furnished as called for in the Bidding Document along with duly filled in, signed & stamped
checklist with each copy of the “Unpriced Bid”
Please tick ( ) the box and ensure compliance:
1.0 EMD of requisite amount is submitted in the form of DD/BG from any scheduled
bank(other than cooperative) as mentioned in Bid Document, in separately sealed
envelope marked “Earnest Money Deposit”.
Submitted
in the form
of DD/BG
EMD value: Rs. ________________
BG No.____________ Dated ______________ Valid Up to _________________
DD No.____________ Dated ______________ Drawn on __________________
2.0 Validity of Bank Guarantee towards Earnest Money Deposit enclosed with Unpriced
(Techno-commercial part)part of your offer (if submitted in the form of BG) is 6 (Six)
months from the date of submission of bid.
Yes
3.0 Validity of offer is up to 6 (Six) months from the date of submission of Technocommercial Part.
Yes
Valid Up to _________________
4.0 Financial Details :
Audited Balance Sheets including Profit and Loss Account Statement for the last 3
(Three) years (Form-F).
Submitted for the years:
21
Submitted
1. __________________
2. __________________
.
3. _________________
5.0 Income Tax PAN (Permanent Account No./Nos. ): Self certified copy/-ies Submitted
Permanent Account No./Nos :
6.0 Fresh Solvency Certificate from your Bankers. (Date of issue of this certificate should
not be earlier than one year from the date of opening of Techno-commercial Part )
Certificate dated __________
Submitted
From (Name of
Bank) _______________
7.0 Details of Bidder Qualification Criterion (Form – C) in the proforma enclosed in the
Bidding Document along with attachment for proof of qualification.
Submitted
8.0 Details of Present Commitments ( Form – D ) in the proforma enclosed in the Bidding
Document
Submitted
9.0 List of equipment (Form-E) proposed to be deployed for the work in the proforma
enclosed in the Bidding Document.
22
Submitted
10.0
Ref: _______________
Bid Compliance Statement (Form- A) (confirmation for no deviation stipulated in Bid)
in the proforma enclosed.
Submitted
11.0
Exception and Deviation Statement (Form_ B) in the proforma enclosed.
Submitted
12.0
Original Bidding Document along with blank (un-priced) copy of Price Bid / Schedule of
Rates and addendum, if any.
Submitted
13.
Declaration regarding non blacklisted/non banned party as per the format
Enclosed (Form G) :
Submitted
14 .
All pages of base rate attachment stamped and signed by the authorised
Signatory of the bidder & submitted with unpriced bid.
Submitted
23
15 .
All pages / documents are stamped and signed by the authorised
signatory of the bidder :
Yes
16 .
Price bid , duly signed by the bidder & submitted in a seperate sealed
envelope.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
:
________________
NAME OF BIDDER
:
________________
COMPANY SEAL
:
________________
24
SECTION- 1
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
25
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF WORKS CONTRACTS
I
PRELIMINARY
1.1
This is a contract for execution of _____________________work at________________
____________________________(please fill up the blanks).
1.2
The tenderer for the above mentioned item of work is ____________________________
_____________________________(please give the name and address of the tenderer).
1.3.1
The terms and conditions mentioned hereunder are the terms and conditions of the contract for
the execution of the work mentioned under item 1.1 above.
1.3.2
It is the clear understanding between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited and the
tenderer___________________________________________that _______________(name and
address
of
the
tenderer)
in
cas e
of
the
tender
of
___________________________________________________________ is
_________(name
and address of the tenderer) accepted by Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited and an
intimation to that effect is so issued and also a
Purchase Order is placed with
________________________________________________________
(name and
address of the tenderer) this document will be termed as a Contract between the parties and terms
and conditions hereunder would govern the parties interest.
1.3.3
Interpretation of Contract Documents: All documents forming part of the Contract are to be
mutually explanatory. Should there be any discrepancy, inconsistency, error or omission
in the contract, the decision of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be the final
and the contractor shall abide by the decision. The decision shall not be arbitrable. Works shown
upon the drawings but not mentioned in the specification or described in the specifications
without being shown on the drawings shall nevertheless be deemed to be included in the same
manner as if they are shown in the drawings and described in the specifications.
1.3.4
Special conditions of Contract : The special conditions of contract, if any provided and whenever
and wherever referred to shall be read in conjunction with general Terms and conditions of
contract, specifications, drawings, and any other documents forming part of this contract
wherever the context so requires. Notwithstanding the sub division of the documents into separate
sections, parts volumes, every section, part of volume shall be deemed to be supplementary or
complementary to each other and shall be read in whole. In case of any misunderstanding arising
the same shall be referred to decision of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-charge and their
decision shall be final and binding and the decision shall not be arbitrable.
It is the clear understanding that wherever it is mentioned that the contractor shall do /perform a
work and / or provide facilities for the performance of the work, the doing or the performance or
the providing of the facilities is at the cost and expenses of the work not liable to be paid or
reimbursed by the Owner
26
2.
DEFINATIONS
In this contracts unless otherwise specifically provided or defined and unless a contrary intention appears
from the contract the following words and expressions are used in the following meanings;
2.1
The terms “Agreement” wherever appearing in this document shall be read as
“Contract”.
2.2
The “Authority” for the purpose of this Contract shall be the Chairman and Managing
Director or any other person so appointed or authorised.
2.3
The “Chairman and Managing Director” shall mean the Chairman and Managing Director of
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED or any person so appointed,
nominated or designated and holding the office of Chairman & Managing Director.
2.4
The “Change Order” means an order given in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or by Owner to
effect additions to or deletion from or alterations into the work.
2.5
The “Construction Equipment” means all appliances and equipment of whatsoever nature for the
use in or for the execution, completion, operation or maintenance of the work except those
intended to form part of the Permanent Work.
2.6
The “Contract” between the Owner and the Contractor shall mean and include all documents like
enquiry, tender submitted by the contractor and the purchase order issued by the owner and other
documents connected with the issue of the purchase order and orders, instruction, drawing,
change order, directions issued by the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the
execution, completion and commissioning of the works and the period of contract mentioned in
the Contract including such periods of time extensions as may be granted by the owner at the
request of the contractor and such period of time for which the work is continued by the
contractor for purposes of completion of the work.
2.7
“The Contractor” means the person or the persons, firm or Company whose tender has been
accepted by the Owner and includes the Contractor’s legal heirs, representative, successor(s) and
permitted assignees.
2.8
The “Drawings” shall include maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any modifications
approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and such other drawings as may, from time to
time, be furnished or approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.9
The “Engineer-in-Charge or Site-in-Charge” shall mean the person appointed or designated as
such by the Owner and shall include those who are expressly authorised by the owner to act for
and on its behalf.
3.0
The “Owner” means the HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITEDM
incorporated in India having its registered office at PETROLEUM HOUSE, 17, JAMSHEDJI
TAT ROAD, BOMBAY- 4000020 and Marketing office at ___________________________ or
their successors or assignees.
2.10
The “Permanent Work” means and includes works which form a part of the work to be
handed over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of the contract.
27
2.11
The “Project Manger” shall mean the Project Manger of HINDUSTAN PETOLEUM
CORPORATION LIMITED, or any person so appointed, nominated or designated.
2.12
The “Site” means the land on which the work is to be executed or carried out and such other
place(s) for purpose of performing the Contract.
2.13
The “Specifications” shall mean the various technical and other specifications attached
and referred to in the tender documents. It shall also include the latest editions, including all
addenda/corrigenda or relevant Indian Standard Specifications and Bureau of Indian standards.
2.15
The “sub-Contractor” means any person or firm or Company (other than the Contractor) to whom
any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor with the prior written consent of the
Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and their legal heirs, representatives, successors and
permitted assignees of such person. firm or Company.
2.16
The “Temporary Work” means and includes all such works which are a part of the contract for
execution of the permanent work but does not form part of the permanent work confirming to
practices, procedures applicable rules and regulations relevant in that behalf.
2.17 The “Tender” means the document submitted by a person or authority for carrying out the
work and the Tenderer means a person or authority who submits the tender offering to
carry out the work as per the terms and conditions.
2.18
The “Work” shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract or part
thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or substituted works as may
be required for the purposes of completion of the work contemplated under the Contract.
3
SUBMISSION OF TENDER
3.1
Before submitting the Tender, the Tenderer shall at their own cost and expenses visit the site,
examine and satisfy as to the nature of the existing roads, means of communications, the
character of the soil, state of land and of excavations, the correct dimensions of the work facilities
for procuring various constructions and other material and their availability, and shall obtain
information on all matters and conditions as they may feel necessary for the execution of the
works as intended by the Owners and shall also satisfy of the availability of suitable water for
construction of civil works and for drinking purpose and power required for fabrication work etc.
Tenderer, whose tender may be accepted and with whom the Contract is entered into shall not be
eligible and be able to make any claim on any of the said counts in what so ever manner for what
so ever reasons at any point of time and such a claim shall not be raised as dispute and shall not
be arbitrable.
3.2
The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied fully before tendering as to the correctness and
sufficiency of the tender for the works and of the rates and prices quote in the schedule of
quantities which rates and prices shall except as otherwise provided cover all his obligations
under the contract.
3.3
It must be clearly understood that the whole of the conditions and specifications are intended to
be strictly enforced and that no work will be considered as extra work and allowed and paid for
unless they are clearly outside the scope, spirit, meaning of the Contract and intent of the Owner
and have been so ordered in writing by Owner and / or Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge,
whose decision shall be final and binding.
28
3.4
Before filling the Tender the Contractor will check and satisfy all drawings and materials to the
procured and the schedule of quantities by obtaining clarifications from the Owner on all the
items as may be desired by the tenderer. No claim for any alleged loss or compensation will be
entertained on this account, after submission of Tender by the Tenderer /Contractor and such a
claim shall not be arbitrable.
3.5
No escalation in the Tender rates will be permitted for all items except mentioned in appendix- I,
throughout the period of contract or the date of completion of the job whichever is later on
account of any variation in prices of materials or cost of labour or due to any other reasons.
Claims on account of escalation shall not be arbitrable.
3.6
The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The Approved schedule of rate of the
contract will be applicable for variations upto plus or minus 25% of the contract value. No
revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such variations in the contract value, including
variations of individual quantities, addition of new items, alterations, additions/ deletions or
substitutions of items, as mentioned above. Quantities etc. mentioned and accepted in the joint
measurement sheets shall alone be final and binding on the parties.
3.7
Owner reserve their right to award the contract to any tenderer any their decision in this regard
shall be final. They also reserve their right to reject any or all tenders received. No disputes could
be raised by any tenderer(s) whose tender has been rejected.
3.8
The Rates quoted by the Tenderer shall include Costs and expenses on all counts viz. cost of
materials, transportation of machine(S), tools, equipments, labour, power, Administration
charges, price escalations, taxes, profit, etc. except to the extent of the cost of material(s), if any,
agreed to be supplied by Owner and mentioned specifically in that regard in condition of
Contract, in which case, the cost of such material if taken for preparation of the Contractor’s
Bill(s) shall be deducted before making payment of the Bill(s) of the Contractor. The Description
given in the schedule of quantities shall unless otherwise stated be held to include wastage on
materials, carriage and cartage, carrying in and return of empties, hosting, setting, fitting and
fixing in position in all other expenses necessary in and for the full and complete execution and
completion of works and in accordance with good practice and recognised principles in that
regard.
3.9
Employees of the State and Central Govt. and employees of the Public Sector Understanding,
including retired employees are covered under their respective service conditions/rules in regard
to their submitting the tender. All such persons should ensure compliance to the
respective/applicable conditions, rules, etc. Any person not complying with those rules etc. but
submitting the tender in violation of such rules, after being so noticed shall be liable for forfeiture
of the Earnest Money Deposit made with the tender, termination of Contract and sufferance on
account of forfeiture of Security Deposit and sufferance of damages arising as a result of
termination of Contract.
3.10
Tender submitted by Tenderer shall remain valid for a period of 6 months from the date of
opening of the tender. The Tenderer shall not be entitled during the said period of 6 months, to
revoke or cancel the tender without the consent in writing from the Owner.
3.11
In case the tenderer revokes or cancels the tender or varies any of terms of the tender without the
Consent of the Owner, in writing, the Tenderer forfeits the right to the refund of the Earnest
Money paid along with the tender.
29
The prices quoted by the tenderer shall be firm during the validity period of 6 months and
also during the period of Contract including period(s) of extensions of time, if any, as
stated earlier. Escalation in prices for all items except mentioned in appendix- I, will not be
permitted during the said period. The tenderer shall particularly take note of this factor before
submitting their tender(s).
3.12
The works shall be carried out strictly as per approved specifications. Deviations, if any, shall
have to be authorized by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing prior to implementing
deviations. The price benefit, if any, arising out of the accepted deviation shall be passed on to the
Owner. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final in this matter.
3.13
The contractor shall make all arrangements at his own cost to transport the required materials
outside and inside the working places and leaving the premises in a neat ant tidy condition after
completion of the job to the satisfaction of Owner. All material except those agreed to be supplied
by the Owner shall be supplied by the contractor on his own cost and the rates quoted by the
Contactor should be inclusive of all royalties, rents, taxes, duties, octroi, statutory levies, if any,
et c. et c
3.14
The Contractor shall be bound to follow and ensure compliance to all the safety and
security regulations and other statutory rules applicable to the area. In the event of any damage or
loss or sufferance caused due to non-observance of such rules and regulations, the contractor shall
be solely responsible for the same and shall keep the Owner Indemnified against all such losses
and claims arising from the same.
3.15
At any time after acceptance of tender, the Owner reserves the right to add, amend or delete any
work item, the bill of quantities at a later date or reduce the scope of work in the overall interest
of the work by prior discussion and intimation to the Contractor. The decision of Owner, with
reasons recorded there for, shall be final and binding on both the Owner and the Contractor. The
Contractor shall not have right to claim compensation or damage etc. in that regard. The Owner
reserves the right to split the work under this contract between two or more contractors without
assigning any reasons.
3.16.
Contractor shall not be entitled to sublet, sub contract or assign, the work under this Contract
without the prior consent of the Owner obtained in writing.
3.17.
All signatures in tender document shall be dated as well as all the pages of all sections of the
tender documents shall be initialed at the lower position and signed, wherever required in the
tender papers by the Tenderer or by a person holding Power of Attorney authorizing him to sign
on behalf of the tenderer before submission of tender.
3.18.
The tender should be quoted in English, both in figures as well as in words. The rates and amount
tendered by the Tenderer in the schedule of rates for each items and in such a way that insertion is
not possible. The total tendered amount should also be indicated in both figures and words with
the signature of tenderer.
3.19.
All corrections and alterations in the entries of tender paper will be signed in full be the tenderer
with date. No erasures or over writing is permissible.
30
3.20.
Transfer of tender document by one intending tenderer to the one is not permissible. The tenderer
on whose name the tender has been sent only can quote.
3.21.
The tender submitted by a tenderer if found to be incomplete in any or all manners is liable to be
rejected. The decision of the owner in this regard is final and binding. In case of any
error/discrepancy in the amount written in words and figures, the lower amount between the two
shall prevail.
4.0
DEPOSITS
a.
EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)
The tenderer will be required to pay a sum as specified in the covering letter, as earnest money
deposit along with the tender either through a crossed demand draft or a non-revokable Bank
Guarantee in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, from any Scheduled Bank
(other than Co-Operative Bank) payable at Mumbai in favour of Hindustan Petroleum
Corporation Limited, Mumbai in the proforma enclosed. The earnest money deposit will be
refunded after finalization of the contract.
Note: Public sector enterprises and small scale unites registered with National Small Scale
Industries are exempted from payment of Earnest Money Deposit. Small Scale units registered
with National Small Scale Industries should enclose a photocopy of their registration certificate
with their quotation eligible for consideration. The Registration Certificate should remain valid
during the period of the contract that may be entered into with such successful bidder. Such
tenderers should ensure validity of the Registration Certificate for the purpose.
b.
SECURITY DEPOSIT
The tenderer, with whom the contract is decided to be entered into and intimation is so given will
have to make a security deposit of one percent (1%) of total contract value in the form of account
payee crossed demand draft drawn in favour of the Owner payable at Bombay, within 15 days
from the date of intimation of acceptance of their tender, failing which the Owner reserves the
right to cancel the Contract and forfeit the EMD.
5
EXECUTION OF WORK
All the work shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the contract
documents and with such explanatory details, drawings, specifications and instructions as
may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-inCharge, whether mentioned in the Contract or not. The Contractor shall be responsible
for ensuring that works throughout are executed in the most proper and workman- like
manner with the quality of material and workmanship in strict accordance with the
specifications and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in Charge / Site-in-Charge.
The completion of work may entail working in monsoon also. The Contractor must maintain the
necessary work force as may be required during monsoon and plan to execute the job in such a
way the entire project is completed within the contracted time schedule. No extra charge shall be
payable for such work during monsoon. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep the
construction work site free from water during and off the monsoon period at his own cost and
expenses.
31
For working on Sunday/Holidays, the contractor shall obtain the necessary permission from
Engineer In charge / Site In charge in advance. The contractor shall be permitted to work beyond
the normal hours with prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge and the contracts
quoted rate is inclusive of all such extended hours of working and no extra amount shall be
payable by the owner on this account.
5. a.
SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND SITE INSTRUCTIONS
5. a. 1. The Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge shall furnished the contractor with only the four corners
of the work site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set out the works and shall
provide an efficient staff for the purpose and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of such
setting out.
5. a. 2. The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all necessary stakes,
templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all necessary precautions to
prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible for consequences of such removal
or disturbance should the same take place and for their efficient and timely reinstatement. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for the maintenance of all existing survey marks, either
existing or supplied and fixed by the Contractor. The work shall be set out to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in -Charge /Site-in-Charge. The approval thereof or joining in setting out the work
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
5. a. 3. Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all necessary reference
and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags ranging rods, strings and other materials for proper layout
of the work in accordance with the scheme, for bearing marks acceptable to the Engineer-inCharge / Site-in-Charge. The Centre longitudinal or face lines and cross lines shall be marked by
means of small masonry pillars. Each pillar shall have distinct marks at the centre to enable the
odolite to be set over it. No work shall be started until all these points are checked and approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge in writing. But such approval shall not relieve the
contractor of any of his responsibilities. The Contractor shall also provide all labour, materials
and other facilities, as necessary, for the proper checking of layout and inspection of the points
during construction.
5. a. 4. Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under construction should be
protected and fenced by the Contractor.
5. a. 5. On Completion of works, the contractor shall submit the geodetic documents according to which
the work was carried out.
5. a. 6. The Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge shall communicate or confirm his instructions to the
contractor in respect of the executions of work in a “work site order book” maintained in the
office having duplicate sheet and the authorised representative of the contractor shall confirm
receipt of such instructions by signing the relevant entries in the book.
5. a. 7. All instruction issued by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge shall be in writing. The
Contractor shall be liable to carry out the instruction without fail.
5. a. 8. If the Contractor after receipt of written instruction from the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge
requiring compliance within seven days fails to comply with such drawings or ‘instructions’ or
both as the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge may issue, owner may comply and pay other
32
persons to execute any such work whatsoever that may be necessary to give effect to such
drawings or ‘instructions’ and all cost and expenses incurred in connection therewith as certified
by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge shall be borne by the contractor or may be deducted
from amounts due or that may become due to the contractor under the contract or may be
recovered as a debt.
5.a.9. The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal and vertical
alignment, the levels and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectify effectually any
errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out by the Contractor, at his
own cost.
5.a.10. In case any doubts arise in the mind of the Contractor in regard to any expressions, interpretations,
statements, calculations of quantities, supply of material rates, etc. etc., the contractor shall refer
the same to the Site-in-Charge/ Engineer-in-Charge for his clarification, instructions, guidance or
clearing of doubts. The decision of the Engineer-in Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall be final and the
contractor shall be bound by such a decision.
5.a.11. “The Contractor shall take adequate precautions, to ensure that his operations do not create
nuisance or misuse of the work space that shall cause unnecessary disturbance or inconvenience
to others at the work site."
5.a.12. “All fossils, coins articles of value of antiquity and structure or other remains of geological or
archaeological discovered on the site of works shall be declared to be the property of the Owner
and Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent his workmen or any other persons
from removing or damaging any such articles or thing and shall immediately inform the Owner/
Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge.”
5.a.13. “Contractor will be entirely and exclusively responsible to provide and maintain at his expenses all
lights, guards, fencing, etc. when and where even necessary or/ as required by the Engineer-inCharge/Site-in-Charge for the protection of works or safety and convenience to all the members
employed at the site or general public.”
5. b.
COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
The contractor shall after paying the requisite security deposit, commence work within 15 days
from the date of receipt of the intimation of intent from the Owner informing that the contract is
being awarded. The date of intimation shall be the date/ day for counting the starting day/ date
and the ending day/ date will be according calculated. Penalty, if any, for the delay in execution
shall be calculated accordingly.
Contractor should prepare detailed fortnightly construction program
for approval by the
Engineer-in-Charge within one month of receipt of Letter Of Intent. The work shall be executed
strictly as per such time schedule. The period of Contract includes the time required for testing,
rectifications, if any, re-testing and completion of work in all respects to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
#
A Letter of Intent is an acceptance of offer by the Owner and it need not be accepted by the
contractor. But the contractor should acknowledge a receipt of the purchase order within days of
mailing of Purchase Order and delay in acknowledging the receipt will be a breach of contract
33
and compensation for the loss caused by such breach will be recovered by the Owner by
forfeiting earnest money deposit/ bid bond.
5. c.
SUBLETTING OF WORK
5. C. 1. No part of the contract nor any share or interest thereof shall in any manner or degree be
transferred, assigned or sublet, by the Contractor, directly or indirectly to any firm or corporation
whatsoever, without the prior consent in writing of the Owner.
5. c. 2. At the commencement of every month the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge/
Site-in-Charge list of all sub-contractors or other persons or firms engaged by the Contractor.
# 5.c.3.The contract agreement will specify major items of supply or services for which the Contractor
proposes to engage sub-contractor/ sub-Vendor. The contractor may from time to time propose
any addition or deletion from any such list and will submit the proposals in this regard to the
Engineer-in-Charge / Designated officer-in-charge for approval well in advance so as not to
impede the progress of work. Such approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Designated officer-incharge will not relieve the contractor from any of his obligations, duties and responsibilities
under the contract.
5. c. 4. Notwithstanding any sub-letting with such approval as re-said and notwithstanding that the
Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of any sub-contract, the Contractor shall be and
shall remain solely to be responsible for the quality and proper and expeditious execution of the
works and the performance of all the conditions of the contract in all respects as if such subletting
or sub-contracting had not taken place and as if such work had been done directly by the
Contractor.
# 5.c.5. Prior approval in writing of the Owner shall be obtained before any change is made in the
constitution of the contractor/ Contracting agency otherwise contract shall be deemed to have
been allotted in contravention of clause entitled “sub-letting of works” and the same action may
be taken and the same consequence shall ensue as provided in the clause of “sub-letting of
works”.
5. D
EXTENSION OF TIME
It the contractor does not complete the work within the contractual period he may apply in writing
to the owner before two months of the period of expiry of the contract stating therein in detail, the
reasons on which he desires to have extension and the period of extension, the contractor so
desires. The owner on his part shall consider the request of the contractor for such extension of
time and shall take a decision after discussion with the contractor and communicate the same to
the contractor before 30 days of expiry of the contract. The decision of the owner in his regard
shall be final and binding.
If the owner extends the time for completion of work as mentioned above, it shall be the
understanding between the owner and the contractor that the contractor shall be liable to pay
damages, cost and expenses to the owner at the rate of 1% per month of the value of the
remaining portion of work to be determined on the last date of the original period of contract,
such value being determined by the owner and accepted by the contractor. In case of any dispute
arising in the determination of the amount, the owner shall be at liberty to terminate the contract,
34
upon which event, consequences would follow according to the term and condition provided
under the Clause for termination of the contract.
5. e .
SUSPENSION OF WORKS
5. e. 1. Subject to the provisions of this contract, the contractor shall if writing by the Engineer-inCharge/ Site-in-Charge for reasons recorded suspend the works or any part thereof for such
period and such time so ordered and shall not, after receiving such, proceed with the work therein
ordered to us pended until he shall have received a written order to re-start. The Contractor shall
be entitled to claim extension of time for that period of time the work was ordered to be
suspended. Neither the Owner nor the Contractor shall be entitled to claim compensation or
damages on account of such an extension of time.
5. e. 2. In case of suspension of entire work, ordered in writing by Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge,
for a period of 30 days, the Owner shall have the option to terminate the Contract as provided
under the clause for termination. The Contractor shall not be at liberty to remove from the site of
the works any plant or materials belonging to him and the Employer shall have lien upon all such
plant and materials.
5. e. 3. The contract shall, in case of suspension have the right to raise a dispute and have the same
arbitrated but however, shall not have the right to have the work stopped from further progress
and completion either by the owner or through other contractor appointed by the owner.
5. f .
OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK
Not withstanding anything contained elsewhere in this contract, the owner upon failure of the
Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with the provisions of this
contract, may instead of Contract and undertaking charge of entire work, place additional labour
force, tools, equipment and materials on such parts of the work, as the Owner may decide or
engage another Contractor to carryout the balance of work. In such case, the Owner shall have the
right to deduct from the amounts payable to the Contractor the difference in cost of such work
and material with ten percent overhead added to cover all departmental charge. Should the total
amount thereof exceed the amount due to the contractor, the Contractor shall pay the difference to
the Owner within 15 days of making demand for payment failing which the Contractor shall be
liable to pay interest at 24% p.a. on such amounts till the date of payment.
5. g.
INSPECTION OF WORK
5. g. 1. The Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge and Officers from Central or State Government will
have full power and authority to inspect the works at any time wherever in progress, either on the
site or at the Contractor’s premises/ workshop of any person, firm or corporation where work in
connection with the contract may be in hand or where the materials are being or are to be
supplied, and the Contractor shall afford or Procure for the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge
every facility and assistance to carryout such inspection. The Contractor shall, at all times during
during the usual working hours and at all other times at which reasonable notice of the intention
of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge or his representative to visit the works shall have been
given to the Contractor, either himself be present to receive orders and instructions, or have a
responsible agent, duly accredited in writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the
Contractor’s agent shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the
35
Contractor himself. The Contractor shall give not less than seven days notice in writing to the
Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge before covering up or otherwise placing beyond reach of
inspection and measurement any work in order that the same may be inspected and measured. In
the event of breach of above, the same shall be uncovered at Contractor’s expense for carrying
out such measurement and/ or inspection.
5. g. 2. No material shall be removed and dispatched by the Contractor from the site without the prior
approval in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor is to provide at all times during the
progress of the work and the maintenance period proper means of access with ladders, gangways,
etc. and the necessary attendance to move and adapt as directed for inspection or measurements
of the works by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge .
5. h.
SAMPLES
5. h. 1. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge for approval when
requested or required adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be used in the work.
5. h. 2. Samples shall be furnished by the Contractor sufficiently in advance and before commencement
of the work so as the Owner can carry out tests and examinations thereof and approve or reject
the samples for use in the works. All material samples furnished and finally used/ applied in
actual work shall fully be of the same quality of the approved samples.
5. i .
TESTS FOR QUALITY OF WORK
5. i. 1. All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the contract documents and in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge and shall be
subjected from time to time to such tests at Contractor’s cost as the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-inCharge may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the site or at all or any such
places. The Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, labour and materials as are normally
required for examining, measuring and testing any workmanship as may be selected and required
by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge.
5. i. 2. All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of the work as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge shall be carried out at the contractors cost and expenses.
5. i. 3. If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials or
workmanship to be supplied by the owner, such tests shall be carried out by the Contractor as per
instructions of Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge and expenses for such tests, if any, incurred
by the Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner. The Contractor should file his claim with the
owner within 15 days of inspection/ test and any claim made beyond that period shall lapse and
be not payable.
5. j .
ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS, DESIGNS AND WORKS
5. j. 1. The Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge shall have powers to make any alterations, additions and/
or substitutions to the schedule of quantities, the original specifications, drawings, designs and
instructions that may become necessary or advisable or during the progress of the work and the
Contractor shall be bound to carryout such altered/extra/new items of work in accordance with
instructions which may be given to him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-inCharge. Such alterations, omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the contract.
36
The altered, additional or substituted work which the Contractor may be directed to carryon in the
manner as part of the work shall be carried out by the Contractor on the same conditions in all
respects on which he has agreed to do the work. The time for completion of such altered added
and / or substituted work may be extended for that part of the particular job. The rates for such
additional altered or substituted work under this Clause shall, be worked out in accordance with
the following provisions:
5. j. 2. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the contract for similar
class of work, the Contractor is bound to carryout the additional, altered or substituted work at the
same rates as are specified in the contract.
5. j. 3. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically provided in the
contract for the work, the rates will be derived from the rates for similar class of work as are
specified in the contract for the work. In the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge as
to whether or not the rates can be reasonably so derived from the items in this contract, will be
final and binding on the Contractor.
5. j. 4. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work cannot be determined in the manner
specified above, then the Contractor shall, within seven days of the date of receipt of order to
carry out the work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge of the rate at which he intends
to charge for such class of work, supported by analysis of the rate or rates clamed and the
Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge shall determine the rates on the basis of the prevailing market
rates for both material and labour plus 10% to cover overhead and profit of labour rates and pay
the Contractor accordingly. The opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge as to current
market rates of materials and the quantum of labour involved per unit of measurement will be
final and binding on the Contractor.
5. j.5. The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of rates will be
applicable for variations of upto +25% of the estimated contact value. No revision of schedule of
rates will be permitted for such variations in the contract value, even for individual quantities,
addition of new items, alterations, additions/ deletions or substitutions of items, as mentioned
above.
5.j.6.
In case of any item of work which there is no specification supplied by the Owner and is
mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian
Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the same, the work
should be carried out as per standard Engineering Practice subject to the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge.
5. k.
PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE
Acceptance of sections of the works for purposes of equipment erection, electrical work and
similar usages by the Owner and payment for such work shall not constitute a waiver of any
portion of this contract and shall not be construed so as to prevent the Engineer from requiring
replacement of defective work that may become apparent after the said acceptance and also shall
not absolve the Contractor of the obligations under this contract. It is made clear that such an
acceptance does not indicate or denote or establish to the fact of execution of that work or the
Contract until the work is completed in full in accordance with the provisions of this Contract.
5. l .
COMPLETION OF WORK AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
37
As soon as the work is completed in all respects, the contractor shall gives notice
of such completion to the site in charge or the Owner and within thirty days of receipt of such
notice the site in charge shall inspect the work and shall furnish the contractor with a certificate of
completion indicating:
a) Defects, if any, to be rectified by the contractor
b)
Items, if any, for which payment shall be made in reduced rates
c)
The date of completion.
5. m. USE OF MATERIALS AND RETURN OF SURPLUS MATERIALS
5. m. 1. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in or all of the clauses of this contract, where
any materials for the execution of the contract are procured with the assistance of Government
either by issue from Government stocks or purchase made
under orders permits or licenses issued by Government, the Contractor shall use the said materials
economically and solely for the purpose of the contract and shall not dispose them of without the
permission of the Owner.
5. m.2. All surplus (serviceable) or unserviceable materials that may be left over after the completion of
the contact or at its termination for any reason whatsoever, the Contractor shall deliver the said
product to the Owner without any demur. The price to be paid to the Contractor, if not already
paid either in full or in part, however, shall not exceed the amount mentioned in the Schedule of
Rates for such material and in cases where such rates are not mentioned, shall not exceed the
CPWD scheduled rates. In the event of breach of the aforesaid condition the contractor shall
become liable for contravention of the Contract.
5. m. 3. The surplus(serviceable) and unserviceable products shall be determined by joint
measurement. In case where joint measurement has failed to take place, the Owner may
measure the same and determine the quantity.
5. m. 4. It is made clear that the Owner shall not be liable to take stock and keep possession and pay
for the surplus and unserviceable stocks and Owner may direct the Contractor to take back
such material brought by the Contractor and becoming surplus and which the Owner may decide
to keep and not to pay for the same.
5. n.
DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD
The contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from the date
of completion of the job. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the
time of the job shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own cost. The
decision of the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge / Owner shall be the final in deciding
whether has to be rectified or replaced.
Equipment or spare parts replaced under warranty/ guarantees shall have future warranty
for a mutually agreed period from the date of acceptance.
The owner shall intimate the defects noticed in writing by a Registered A. D. letter or
otherwise and contractor within 15 days of receipt of the intimation shall start the
38
rectification work and complete within the time specified by the owner failing which the
owner will get the defects rectified by themselves or by any other Contractor and the
expenses incurred in getting the same done shall be paid by the Contractor under the
provision of the Contract.
Thus, defect liability is applicable only in case of job/ works contract (civil, mechanical,
electrical, maintenance etc.) Where any damage of defect may arise in future (i.e. within 12
months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at the time of completion
of job.
In other words, in case of service contracts (like car hire etc.) where there is no question of
damage or defect arising in future, the defect liability clause is not applicable.
5. o.
DAMAGE TO PROPERTY
5. o.1. Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Owner any loss
of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or being
executed or procured by the Owner or of other agencies within the premises of the work
of the Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/ or the negligence or willful acts
or omission of the Contractor , his employees, agents, representatives or sub –contractors.
5. o. 2. The Contractors shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims for all claims
for damage to Owner’s property arising under or by reason of this contract.
6.
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBLITIES OF CONTRACTOR
6. a.
EMPLOYMENTN LIABILITY TOWARDS WORKERS EMPLOYED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
6. a. 1. The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or employing persons for
the execution of work. All persons engaged by the contractor shall be on Contractor’s payroll and
paid by Contractor. All disputes or difference between the Contractor and his/their employees
shall be settled by Contractor.
6. a. 2. Owner has absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall indemnity Owner against any loss or damage or liability arising out of or in the
course of his/ their employing persons or relation with his/their employees. The Contractor shall
make regular and full payment of wages and on any complaint by any employee of the Contractor
or his sub contractor regarding non-payment of wages, salaries or other dues, Owner reserves the
right to make payments directly to such employees or sub-Contractor of the Contractor and
recover the amount in full from the bills of the Contractor and the Contractor shall not claim any
compensation or reimbursement thereof. The Contractor shall comply with the Minimum Wages
Act applicable to the area of work site with regard to payment of wages to his employees and also
to employees of his sub Contractor.
6. a. 3. The Contractor shall advise in writing or in such appropriate way to all of his employees and
employees of sub-contractors and any other person engaged by him that their
appointment/employment is not by the Owner but by the Contractor and that their present
appointment is only in connection with the construction contract with Owner and that therefore,
39
such an employment/ appointment would not enable or make them eligible for any
employment/appointment with the Owner either temporarily or/and permanent basis.
6. b.
NOTICE TO LOCAL BODIES
The Contractor shall comply with and give all notices required under any Government authority,
instruction, rule or order made under any act of parliament, state laws or any regulations or bylaws of any local authority relating to the works.
6. c .
FIRST AID AND INDUSTRIAL INJURIES
6. c.1. Contractor shall maintain first aid facility for his employees and those of his sub-contractors.
6. c.2. Contractor shall make arrangements for ambulance service and for the treatment of all types
injuries. Names and telephone numbers of those providing such services shall be furnished
Owner prior to start of construction and their name board shall be prominently displayed
Contractor’s field office.
of
to
in
6. c.3. All industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to owner and a copy of Contractor’s report
covering each personal injury requiring the attention and their name board shall be prominently
displayed in Contractor’s field office.
6. d.
SAFETY CODE
6. d.1. The Contractor shall at his own expenses arrange for the Safety provisions as may be necessary
for the execution of the work or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge in respect of all labours
directly or indirectly employed for performance of the works and shall provide all facilities in
connections therewith. In case the Contractor fails to make arrangements and provide necessary
facilities as aforesaid, the Owner shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the
Contractor.
6. d.2. From the commencement to the completion of the works, the Contractor shall take full
responsibility for the care thereof and of all the temporary works (defined as meaning all
temporary works of every kind required in or for the execution, completion or maintenance of the
work). In case damage, loss or injury shall happen to the works or to any part thereof or to
temporary works or to any cause whatsoever repair at his (Contractor’s) own cost and make good
the same so that at the time of completion, the works shall be in good order and condition and in
every respect with the requirement of the contract and Engineer-in-Charge’s instructions.
6. d.3. In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance of the
Contractor’s part of this agreement, the con shall at his own expense arrange for all the safety
provisions as per relevant Safety Codes of C.P.W.D Bureau of Indian Standards, the Electricity
Act/I.E. Rules. The Mines Act and such other Acts as applicable.
6. d.4. The Contractor shall observe and abide by all fire and safety regulations of the Owner. Before
starting construction work, the Contractor shall consult with Owner’s Safety Engineer or
Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge and must make good to the satisfaction of the Owner any
loss or damage due to fire to any portion of the work done or to be done under this agreement or
to any of the Owner’s existing property.
40
6. d.5. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions of the
Contract Labour Act and shall pay rates of Wages and observe hours of work/conditions of
employment according to the rules in force from time to time.
6. d.6. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provision including
documentation and submission of reports on the above to the concerned authorities and shall
indemnity the Corporation from any such lapse for which the Government will be taking action
against them.
6. d.7. Owner shall on a report having been made by an inspecting office as defined in the Contract
Labour Regulations have the power to deduct from the money due to the Contractor any sum
required or estimated to be required for making good the loss suffered by a worker(s) by reasons
of non-fulfillment of conditions of contract for the benefit of workers no-payment of wages or of
deductions made from his or their wages which are not justified by the terms of contract or non
observance of the said Contractor’s labour Regulation.
6. e .
INSURANCE AND LABOUR
The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for the compliance
with all obligation imposed by Employees State Insurance State Insurance Act, 1948, and the
Contractor further agrees to defend indemnity and hold Owner harmless from any liability or
penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or local authority by reason of any asserted
violation by Contractor, or sub-contractor of the Employees’ State Insurance Act,1948 and also
from all claims, suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising under,
growing out of or by reason of the work provided for by this contract whether brought by
employees of the Contractor, by third parties or by Central or State Government authority or any
political sub-division thereof.
The Contractor agrees to file with the Employees State Insurance Corporation, the Declaration
forms and all forms which may be required in respect of the Contractor’s or sub-Contractor’s
employee whose aggregate remuneration is within the specified limit and who are employed in
the work provided or those covered by ESI Act under any amendment to the Act from time to
time
The Contractor shall deduct and secure the agreement of the sub-contract to deduct the
employee’s contribution as per the first schedule of the Employee’s State Insurance Act from
wages and affix the employee’s contribution cards at wages payment intervals. The Contractor
shall remit and secure the agreement of the sub contractor to remit to the State Bank of India,
Employee’s State Insurance Corporation Account, and the Employee’s contribution as required
by the Act
The Contractor agrees to maintain all records as required under the Act in respect of employees
and payments and the Contractor shall secure the agreement of the sub contractor to maintain
such records. Any expenses incurred for the contributions, making contribution or maintaining
records shall be to the Contractor’s or sub-contractor’s account.
Owner shall retain such sum as may be necessary from the total contract value until the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contributions, as required by the Employees
state Insurance Act, 1948, have been paid.
41
WORKMAN’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYEE’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
Provide Insurance for all the Contractor’s employees engaged in the performance of this contract.
If any of the work is sublet, the Contractor shall ensure that the sub-Contractor provides
workmen’s compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance for the latter’s employees who are
not covered under the Contractor’s insurance.
vi .
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE
Contractor shall take out Insurance to cover all risks to Owner for each of his vehicles plying on
works of his contract and these insurances shall be valid for the total contract period. No extra
payment will be made for this insurance. Owner shall not be liable for any damage or loss not
good by the Insurance Company, should such damage or loss result from un-authorised use of the
vehicle. The provisions of the Motor Vehicle Act would apply.
vi i .
FIRE INSURANCE
Contractor shall within two weeks after award of contract Insure the Works, Plant and Equipment
and keep them insured until the final completion of the Contract against loss or damage by
accident, fire or any other cause with an insurance company to be approved by the
Employer/Consultant in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor (name of the former
being placed first in the Policy). Such Policy shall cover the property of the Employer only.
6. e. 2. ANY OTHER INSURANCE REQUIRED UNDER LAW OR REGULATION OR BY
OWNER
Contractor shall also provide and maintain any and all insurance which may be required under
any law or regulations from time to time. He shall also carry and maintain any other insurance
which may be required by the Owner.
The aforesaid insurance policy/ policies shall provide that they shall not be cancelled till the
Engineer-in-Charge has agreed to their cancellation.
The Contractor shall satisfy to the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge from time to time that he
has taken out all insurance policies referred to above and has paid the necessary premium for
keeping the policies alive till the expiry of the defects liability period.
The Contractor shall insure that similar insurance policies are taken out by his sub-contractor (if
any) and shall be responsible for any claims or losses to the Owner resulting from their failure to
obtain adequate insurance protections in connection thereof. The Contractor shall produce or
cause to be proceed by his sub-contractor (if any) as the case may be, the relevant policy or
policies and premium receipts as and when required by the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge.
6. e. 3 LABOUR AND LABOUR LAWS
The Contractor shall at his own cost employ persons during the period of contract and the persons
so appointed shall not be construed under any circumstances to be in the employment of the
Owner.
42
All payments shall be made by the contractor to be the labour employed by him in accordance
with the various rules and regulations stated above. The Contractor shall keep the Owner
indemnified from any claims whatsoever inclusive of damages/costs or otherwise arising from
injuries or alleged injuries to or death of a person employed by the contractor or damages or
alleged damages to the property.
No labour below the age of eighteen years shall be employed on the work. The Contractor shall
not pay less than what is provided under the provisions of the contract labour (Regulations and
Abolition) Act, 1970 and the rules made there-under and as may be amended from time to time.
He shall pay the required deposit under the Act appropriate to the number of workman to be
employed by him or through sub contractor and get himself registered under the Act. He shall
produce the required certificates to the Owner before commencement of the work. The Owner
recognises only the Contractor and not his sub contractor under the provisions of the Act. The
Contractor will have to submit daily a list of his workforce. He will also keep the wage register at
the work site or/ and produce the same to the Owner, whenever desired. A deposit may be taken
by the Owner from the Contractor to be refunded only after the Owner is satisfied that all
workmen employed by the Contractor have been fully paid for the period of work in Owner’s
premises at rates equal to or better than wages provided for under the Minimum Wages Act. The
contractor shall be responsible and liable for any complaints that may arise in this regard and the
consequences thereto.
The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the Employee’s Provident Fund Act and the
family pension Act as may be applicable and as amended from time to time.
The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the payment of Gratuity Act, 1972, as may be
applicable and as amended from time to time.
IMPLEMENTATION OF APPRENTICES ACT, 1961
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the rules and
Orders issued there-under from time to time. If he fails to do so, his failure will be a breach of the
contract and the Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, cancel the contract. The Contractor
shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation by him of the
provision of the Act.
vi i
MODEL RULES FOR LABOUR WELEFARE
The Contractor shall at his own expenses comply with or cause be complied with Model rules for
Labour Welfare as appended to those conditions or rules framed by the Government from time to
time for the protection of health and for making sanitary arrangement form worker employed
directly or indirectly on the works. In case the contractor fails to make arrangements as aforesaid
the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof
from the contractor.
6.f.
DOCUMENTS CONCERNING WORKS
6.f.1.
All documents including drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducible models, plans,
specifications and copies, thereof furnished by the Owner as well as all drawings, tracings,
reproducible, plans, specifications design calculations etc. prepared by the contractor for the
purpose of execution of works covered in or connected with this contact shall not be used by the
43
contractor for any other work but are to be delivered to the Owner at the completion or otherwise
of the contract.
6.f.2. The Contractor shall keep and maintain secrecy of documents, drawings etc. issued to him for the
execution of this contact and restrict access to such documents, drawings etc. and future the
Contractor shall execute a SECRECY agreement from each or any person employed by the
Contractor having access to such documents, drawings etc. The Contractor shall not issue
drawings and documents to any other agency or individual without the written approval by the
Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge.
6.f 3. Contractor will not give any information or document etc. concerning details of the work to the
press or a news disseminating agency without prior written approval from Engineer-in-Charge
/Site-in-Charge. Contractor shall not take any pictures on site without written approval of
Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge
7.
PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR’S BILLS
Payment will be made against Running Accounts bills certified by the Owner’s Engineer-inCharge /Site-in-Charge within 15 days from the date of the receipt of the certified bill by the
Disbursement Section of the respective regional office.
Running Account Bills and the final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor together with the
signed measurements sheet(s) to the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge of the Owner in
quadruplicate for certification. The Bills shall also be accompanied by quantity calculations in
support of the quantities contained in the bill along with cement consumption, statement,
actual/theoretical, wherever applicable duly certified by the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge
of the Owner.
All running Account payments shall be regarded as on account payment(s) to be finally adjusted
against the final bill payment. Payment of Running Account Bill(s) shall not determine or affect
in any way the rights of the Owner under this Contract to make the final adjustments of the
quantities of material, measurements of work and adjustments of amounts etc. etc. in the final
bill.
The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date of completion of
the work fully and completely in all respects. If the contractor fails to submit the final bill
accordingly Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge may make the measurement and determine the
total amount payable for the work carried out by the Contractor and such a certification shall be
final and binding on the Contractor. The Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge may take
the assistance of an outside party for taking the measurement, the expenses of which shall be
payable by the Contractor.
Payment of final bill shall be made within 30 days from the date of receipt of the certified bill by
the Disbursement Section of the respective regional office of HPCL.
7. a.
MEASUREMENT OF WORK
7. a.1. All measurement shall be metric system. All the works will be jointly measured by the
representative of the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge and the Contractor or their authorised
agent progressively. Such measurement will be recorded in the Measurement Book/ Measurement
44
Sheet by the Contractor or his authorised representative and signed in token of acceptance by the
Owner or their authorised representative.
7. a.2. For the purpose of taking joint measurement, the Contractor / representative shall be bound to be
present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge. If, however, they are
absent for any reasons whatsoever, the measurement will be taken by the Engineer-in-Charge
/Site-in-Charge or his representative and the same would be deemed to be correct and binding on
the Contractor.
7. a.3. In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement for any item of work, the latest Indian
Standard Specifications shall be followed. In case of any further dispute on the same the same
shall be as per the certification of an outside qualified Engineer/ Consultant. Such a measurement
shall be final and binding on the Owner and the Contractor.
7. b.
BILLING OF WORKS EXECUTED
The Contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the Engineer-inCharge / Site-in-Charge of the work giving abstract and detailed measurement for the various
items executed during a month, before the expiry of the first week of the succeeding month. The
Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge shall take or cause to be taken the requisite measurement for
the purpose of having the bill verified and/ or checked before forwarding the same to the
disbursement office of the Owner for further action in terms of the contract and payment
thereafter. The Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge shall verify the bills within 7 days of
submission of the Bill by the Contractor.
7. c .
RETENTION MONEY
10% of the total value of the Running Account and Final Bill will be deducted and retained by the
Owner as retention money on account of any damage/defect liability that may arise for the period
covered under the defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of interest. Any
damage of defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of completion certificate
connected in any way with the equipment or materials supplied by Contractor or in workmanship
shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own expense failing which the Owner shall
be entitled to rectify the said damage/defect from the retention money. Any excess of expenditure
incurred by the Owner on account of damage or defect shall be payable by the Contractor. The
decision of the Owner in this behalf shall not be liable to be questioned but shall be final and
binding on the Contractor.
Thus, deduction towards retention money is applicable only in case of job/works contracts (civil,
mechanical, electrical, maintenance etc.) Where any damage or defect may arise in future (i.e.
within 12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of
completion certificate.
7. d.
TAXES, DUTIES, OCTROI ETC.
7. d.1. The Contractor accepts full and exclusive liability for the payment of any and all taxes, duties,
octrai, rates, cess, levies, and statutory payments payable under all or any of the statutes etc. now
or hereafter imposed, increased from time in respect of works and materials and all contributions
and taxes for unemployment compensation, insurance and old age pensions or annuities now or
hereafter imposed by Central or State Governmental authorities which are imposed with respect
to or covered by the wages, salaries or other compensations paid to the persons employed by the
45
Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance with all obligations and
restrictions imposed by the Labour Law or any other law affecting employer-employee
relationship and the Contractor further agrees to comply and to secure the compliance of all subcontractors with all applicable Central, State, Municipal and local Laws, and regulations and
requirements of any Central, State or Local Government agency or authority.
Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnity and hold harmless from any liability or penalty
which may be imposed by the Central, State or Local authorities by reason of any violation by
Contractor or sub-Contractor of such laws, regulations or requirements and also from all claims,
suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of, or by
reasons of the work provided for by this contract by third parties, or by Central and State
Government authority or any administrative sub-division thereof. The Contractor further agrees
that in case any such demand is raised against the Owner, and Owner has no way but to pay and
pays/makes payment of the same, the Owner shall have the right to deduct the same from the
amounts due and payable to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not raise any demand or dispute
in respect of the same but may have recourse to recover/receive from the concerned authorities on
the basis of the Certificate of the Owner issued in that behalf.
7. d.2. The rates quoted should be inclusive of all rates, cess, taxes and sales tax on works contracts
wherever applicable. However, wherever the sales tax on works contract is applicable and is to be
deducted at source, the same will be deducted from the bills of the Contractor and paid to the
concerned authorities. The proof of such payments of sales tax on works contract will be
furnished to the Contractor.
7. d.3. Income tax will be deducted at source as per rules at prevailing rates, unless certificate, if any, for
deduction at lesser rate or nil deduction is submitted by the Contractor from appropriate authority.
7. e .
MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
7. e.1. The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required for construction
including tools, tackles, construction plant equipment for the completion and maintenance of the
works except the materials viz. steel and cement which may be agreed to be supplied as provided
elsewhere in the contract. The Contractor shall make arrangement for procuring such materials
and for the transport thereof at their own cost and expenses.
7. e.2. The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if so desired by the
Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature. The Contractor shall procure materials of
ISI stamp/certification and supplied by reputed suppliers borne on DGS&D list.
7. e.3. All materials procured should meet the specifications given in the tender document. The
Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test certificates for any batch of
any materials procured. Before procuring, the Contractor should get the approval of Engineer-inCharge / Site-in-Charge for any materials to be used for the works.
7. e.4. Manufacturer’s certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by the Contractor. If,
however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge any tests are required to be
conducted on the material supplied by the Contractor, these will be arranged by the Contractor
promptly at his own cost.
7. f .
MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER
46
7. f.1. Steel and Cement may be supplied by the Owner to the Contractor against payment by Contractor
from either godown or from the site or within work premises itself and the Contractor shall
arrange for all transport to actual work site at no extra cost.
7. f.2. The Contractor shall bear all the costs including loading and unloading, carting from issue points
to work spot storage, unloading, custody and handling and stacking the same and return the
surplus steel and cement to the Owner’s storage point after completion of job.
7. f.3. The Contractor will be fully accountable for the steel and cement received from the Owner and
Contractor will give acknowledgement/receipt for quantity of steel and cement received by him
each time he uplifts cement from Owner’s custody.
7. f.4. For all computation purposes, the theoretical cement consumption shall be considered as per
CPWD standards.
7. f 5. Steel and Cement as received from the manufacturer/ stockists will be issued to the Contractor.
Theoretical weight of cement in a bag will be considered as 50 Kg. Bags weighing upto 4% less
shall be accepted by the Contractor and considered as 50 Kg. per bag. Any shortage in the weight
of any cement bag by more than 4% will be to the Owner’s account only when pointed out by the
Contractor and verified by Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge at the time of Contract or taking
delivery.
7. f.6. The Contractor will be required to maintain a stock register for receipt, issuance and consumption
of steel and cement at site. Cement will be stored in a warehouse at site. Requirement of cement
on any day will be taken out of the warehouse. Cement issued shall be regulated on the basis of
FIRST RECEIPT to go as FIRST ISSUE.
7. F.7. Empty cement bag shall be the property of the Contractor. Contractor shall be penalised for any
excess/ under consumption of cement. The penal rate will be twice the rate of issue of cement for
this work.
7. f.8. All the running bills as well as final bills will be accompanied by cement construction statements
giving the detailed working of the cement used, cement received and stock-in-hand.
7. f.9. The Contractor will be fully responsible for safe custody of cement once information technology
is received by him and during transport.. Owner will not entertain any claims of the Contractor
for theft, loss or damage to cement while in their custody.
7.f.10 .The Contractor shall not remove from the site any cement bags at any time.
7.f.11. The Contractor shall advise Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge in writing at least 21 days before
exhausting the Cement stocks already held by Contractor to ensure that such delays do not lead to
interruptions in the progress of work.
7.f.12. Cement shall not supplied by the Owner for manufacturing of mosaic tiles, pre-cast cement jail and
any other bought out items which consume cement and for temporary works.
7.f.13. Cement in bags and in good usable condition left over after the completion of work shall be
returned by the Contractor to the Owner. The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor at the
supply rate for such stocks of cement they accept and receive. Any refused stock of cement shall
47
be removed by the Contractor from the site at his cost and expenses within 15 days of completion
of the work.
8.
PAYMENT OF CLAIMS AND DAMAGES
8. 1.
Should the Owner have to pay money in respect of claims or demands as aforesaid the amount so
paid and the costs incurred by the Owner shall be charged to and paid by the Contractor and the
Contractor shall not be entitled to dispute or question the right of the Owner to make such
payments notwithstanding the same may have been without his consent or authority or in law or
otherwise to the contrary.
8. 2.
In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923, or
other Acts, the Owner is obliged to pay Compensation to a Workman employed by the Contractor
in execution of the works, the Owner will recover from the Contractor the amount of
compensation so paid and without prejudice to the rights of Owner under the said Act. Owner
shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security
deposit or from any sum due to the Contractor whether under this contract or otherwise. The
Owner shall not be bound to contest any claim made under Section 12 sub section (1) of the said
Act, except on the written request of the Contractor and upon his giving to the Owner full security
for all costs for which the owner might become liable in consequence of contesting such claim.
8. a.
ACTION AND COMPENSATION IN CASE OF BAD WORK
If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge that any work has been executed with
bad, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials, or that any materials or articles
provided by the Contractor for execution of the work are not of standards specified/inferior
quality to that contracted for, or otherwise not in accordance with the contract, the
CONTRACTOR shall on demand in writing from the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge or his
authorised representative specifying the work, materials or articles complained of,
notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for,
forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct the work so specified and at his own charge and cost
and expenses and in the event of failure to do so within a period of 15 days of such intimation/
information/ knowledge, the Contractor shall be liable to pay compensation equivalent to the cost
of reconstruction by the Owner. On expiry of 15 days period mentioned above, the Owner may by
themselves or otherwise rectify or remove and re-execute the work or remove and replace with
others, the materials or articles complained of as the case may be at the risk and expenses in all
respects of the Contractor. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge as to any
question arising under this clause shall be final and conclusive and shall not be raised as a dispute
or shall be arbitrable.
8. b.
INSPECTION AND AUDIT OF CONTRACT AND WORKS
This project is subject to inspection by various Government agencies of Government of India.
The Contractor shall extend full cooperation to all the Government and other agencies in the
inspection of the works, audit of the Contract and the documents of Contract Bills, measurements
sheets etc. etc. and examination of the records of works and make enquiries interrogation as they
may deem fir, proper and necessary. Upon inspection etc. by such agencies if it is pointed out that
the contract work has not been carried out according to the prescribed terms and conditions as
laid down in the tender documents and if any recoveries are recommended, the same shall be
48
recovered from the Contractor running bills/final bill/from ordered/suggested Security
Deposit/retention money. The Contractor shall not rise and dispute on any such account and the
same shall not be arbitrable.
9.
CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNITY THE OWNER
The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and employer of the
Owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge and his staff against all the actions,
proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses, whatsoever arising out of or in connection with
the works and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses which may be made
against the Owner for or in respect of or in respect of or arising out of any failure by the
Contractor in the performance of his obligations under the contract. The Contractor shall be liable
for or in respect of or in consequence of any accident or injury to any workman or other person in
the employment of the Contractor or his sub contractor and Contractor shall indemnify and keep
indemnified the Owner against all such damages, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses
whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.
10 .
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
In case of delay in completing the work beyond the period of contact the contractor shall be liable
to pay liquidated damages at the rate of 0.5% of the total contract value for every week or part
thereof of the delay subject to a maximum of 5% of the total contract value. The liquidated
damages shall be recovered by the Owner out of the amounts, payable to the Contractor or from
the Guarantees or Deposits furnished by the Contractor or the Retention Money retained from the
Bills of the Contractor. Should the amount of liquidated damages is not recoverable or recovered
in any manner in part or in full, the same shall be payable by the Contractor on demand by the
Owner with 24% p.a. interest till the date of payment.
11 .
DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER OR TERMINATION OF WORK CONTRACT BY
OWNER
The Contractor shall remain responsible and liable to make good all losses or damages that may
occur/appear to the work carried out under this contract within a period of 12 months from date of
issue of the Completion Certificate and/or the date of Owner taking over the work, which ever is
earlier. The Contractor shall issue a Bank Guarantee to the Owner in the sum of 10% of the work
entrusted in the Contract, from any nationalised Bank acceptable to the Owner and if however,
the Contractor fails to furnish such a Bank Guarantee the Owner shall have right to retain the
Security Deposit and Retention Money to cover the 10% of the Guarantee amount under this
clause and to return/refund the same after the expiry of the period of 12 months without any
interest thereon.
12 .
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT
12.1.
The owner may terminate the contract at any stage of the construction for reasons to be
recorded in the letter of termination.
The Owner inter-alia may terminate the Contract for any or all of the following reasons that the
Contractor. has abandoned the Work/Contract. has failed to commence the works, or has without
any lawful excuse under these conditions suspended the work for 15 consecutive days. has failed
12.2
49
to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace the work within 15 days after
receiving from the Engineer written notice that the said materials or work were condemned and/or
rejected by the Engineer under specified conditions. has neglected or failed to observe and
perform all or any of the terms acts, matters or things under this Contract to be observed and
performed by the Contractor .has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance of the
Engineer’s instructions to the contrary sub-let any part of the Contract. has acted in any manner
to the detrimental interest, reputation, dignity, name or prestige of the Owner. Has stopped
attending to work without any prior notice and prior permission for a period of 15 days Has
become untraceable. Has without authority acted of the terms and conditions of this contract and
has committed breach of terms of the contract in best judgment of the owner. Has been declared
insolvent /bankrupt. In the event of sudden death of the Contractor.
The Owner on termination of such contract shall have the right to appropriate the Security
Deposit, Retention Money and invoke the Bank Guarantee furnished by the Contractor and to
appropriate the same towards the amounts due and payable by the Contractor as per the
conditions of Contract and return to the Contractor excess money, if any, left over.
The owner shall have the right to carry out the unexecuted portion of work either by themselves
or by contractor through other agencies at the cost of the Contractor.
The Contractor within or at the time fixed by the Owner shall depute his authorised representative
for taking joint final measurements within 15 days of the date of joint final measurement. If the
Contractor fails to depute their representative for joint measurement, the owner shall take the
measurement with their Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge or any other outside representatives.
Such a measurement shall not be questioned by the Contractor and no dispute can be raised by the
Contractor for purpose of Arbitration.
The Owner may enter upon and take possession of the works and all plant, tools, scaffoldings,
sheds, machinery, power operated tools and steel, cement and other materials of the Contractor at
the site or around the site and use or employ the same for completion of the work or employ any
other Contractor or other person or persons to complete the works. The Contractor shall not in
any way object or interrupt or do any act, matter or thing to prevent or hinder such actions, other
Contractor or other persons employed for completing and furnishing or using the materials and
plant for the works. When the works shall be completed or as soon thereafter the Engineer shall
give a notice in writing to the Contractor to remove surplus materials and plant, if any and
belonging to the Contractor except as provided elsewhere in the Contract and should the
Contractor fail to do so within a period of 15 days after receipt thereof the Owner may sell the
same by public auction and shall give credit to the Contractor for the amount realised. The Owner
shall thereafter ascertain and certify in writing under his hand what (if anything) shall be due to or
by the Owner for the value of the plant and materials so taken possession and the expense or loss
which the Owner shall have been put to in procuring the works, to be so completed, and the
amount if any, owing to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the Owner, as the case may, and
the Certificate of the Owner shall be final and conclusive between the parties.
When the contract is terminated by the Owner for all or any of the reasons mentioned above the
Contractor shall not have any right to claim compensation on account of such termination.
13 .
FORCE MAJEURE
Any delay in or failure of the performance of either part hereto shall not constitute default
hereunder or give rise to any claims for damage, if any, to the extent such delays or failure of
50
performance is caused by occurrences such as Acts of God or an enemy, expropriation or
confiscation of facilities by Government authorities, acts of war, rebellion, sabotage or fires,
floods, explosions, riots, or strikes. The Contractor shall keep records of the circumstances
referred to above and bring these to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge in
writing immediately on such occurrence. The amount of time, if any, lost on any of these counts
shall not be counted for the contract period. One decision of the Owner arrived at after
consultation with the Contractor, shall be final and binding. Such a determined period of time be
extended by the Owner to enable the Contractor to complete the job within such extended period
of time.
If Contractor is prevented or delayed from the performing any of its obligations under this
Agreement by Force Majeure, then Contractor shall notify Owner he circumstances delayed or
prevented, within seven days of the occurrence of the events.
# 14. ARBITRATION
All disputes and differences of whatsoever nature, whether existing or which shall at any time
arise between the parties hereto touching or concerning the agreement, meaning, operation or
effect thereof or to the rights and liabilities of the parties or arising out of or in relation thereto
whether during or after completion of the contract or whether before after determination,
foreclosure, termination or breach of the agreement (other than those in respect of which the
decision of any person is, by the contract, expressed to be final and binding) shall, after written
notice by either party to the agreement to the other of them and to the Appointing Authority
hereinafter mentioned, be referred for adjudication to the Sole Arbitrator to be appointed as
hereinafter provided.
The appointing authority shall either himself act as sole Arbitrator or some officer of Hindustan
Petroleum Corporation Limited (referred to as owner or HPCL) to act as Sole Arbitrator to
adjudicate the disputes and differences between the parties. The contractor/ vendor shall not be
entitled to raise any objection to the appointment of such officer of the owner as the Sole
Arbitrator on the ground that the said officer is an officer and/or shareholder of the owner or that
he/she has to deal or dealt with the matter to which the contract relates or that in the course of
his/her duties as an officer of the owner, he/she has/had expressed views on all or any of the
matters in dispute or difference.
In the event of the Arbitrator to whom the matter is referred to, does not accept the appointment,
or is unable or unwilling to act or resigns or vacates his office for any reasons whatsoever, the
Appointing Authority aforesaid, shall nominate another Officer of the Owner to act as Arbitrator.
Such Officer nominated as Sole Arbitrator shall be entitled to proceed with the arbitration from
the stage at which it was left by his predecessor. It is expressly agreed between the parties that no
person other than the Appointing Authority or an Officer of the Owner nominated by the
Appointing Authority, shall act as an arbitrator.
The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to the Agreement.
The work under the Contract shall, however, continue during the Arbitration proceedings and no
payment due or payable to the concerned party shall be withheld (except to the extent disputed)
on account of initiation, commencement or pendency of such proceedings.
51
The Arbitrator may give a composite or separate Award(s) in respect of each dispute or
difference referred to him and may also make interim award(s) if necessary.
The fees of the Arbitrator and expenses of arbitration, if any shall be borne equally by the parties
unless the Sole Arbitrator otherwise directs in his award with reasons. The Award of the Sole
Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.
Subject to the aforesaid, the provisions of the Arbitration and Council Act.1996 or any statutory
modification or re-enactment thereof and the rules made thereunder, shall apply to the
Arbitration proceedings under this Clause.
The Contract shall be governed by and constructed according to the laws in force in India. The
parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts situated at _________( say
Mumbai*) for all purposes. The Arbitration shall be held at _________( say Mumbai*) and
conducted in English language.
The Appointing Authority is the Functional Director of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation
Limited.
(Note:- * = While printing the GTCs, each purchasing Authorities at various location, may
mention the correct place before printing the GTC and not leave Clause 14.10 blank or as stated
above. Bracketed portion is to be removed.
15 .
GENERAL
Materials required for the works whether brought by the Contractor or supplied by the Owner
shall be stored by the contractor only at places approved by Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge.
Storage and safe custody of the material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge connected with the contract, shall be entitled at
any time to inspect and examine any materials intended to be used in or on the works, either on
the site or at factory or workshop or at other place(s) manufactured or at any places where these
are laying or from which these are being obtained and the Contractor shall give facilities as may
be required for such inspection and examination.
In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification supplied by the owner as is
mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian
Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the same the work
should be carried out as per standard Engineering practice subject to the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge /Site-in-Charge.
Should the work be suspended by reason of rain, strike, lockouts or other cause the Contractor
shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of the work and at his own expense shall
make good any damage arising from any of these causes.
The Contractor shall cover up and protect from injury from any cause all new work also for
supplying all temporary doors, protection to windows and any other requisite protection for the
whole of the works executed whether by himself or special tradesmen or sub-contractors and any
damage caused must be made good by the Contractors at his own expense.
52
# 15.6 If the contractor has quoted the items under the deemed exports, then it will be the responsibility
of the contractor to get all the benefits under deemed exports from the Government. The Owner’s
responsibility shall only be limited to the issuance of required certificates. The quotation will be
unconditional and phrases like “subject to availability of deemed exports benefit” etc. will not
find place in it.
53
( SPECIMEN )
BANK GUARANTEE IN LIEU OF EARNEST MONEY
( on Non- Judicial stamp paper of appropriate value )
.
To
:
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited
( Address as applicable )
IN CONSIDERATION OF MESSRS. HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION
LIMITED a Government of India Company registered under the Companies Act, 1956, having its
registered office at 17, Jamshedji Tata Road, Bombay – 20 ( hereinafter called “ The
Corporation” which expression shall include its successor in business and assigns ) issued a
tender on Messrs. ……………………………………………………………. A partnership firm/
sole proprietor business/ a company registered under the Companies Act, 1956 having its office at
( hereinafter called “the Tenderer” which expression shall include its executors, administrators
and assigns ) against Tender no…………….. dated …………………….( hereinafter called “the
tender” which expression shall include any amendments/ alterations to “the tender” issued by
“the Corporation”) for the supply of goods to/ execution of services for “the Corporation” and
“the Corporation” having agreed not to insist upon immediate payment of Earnest Money for the
fulfillment of the said tender in terms thereof on production of an acceptable Bank Guarantee for
an amount of Rs. ……………….( Rupees …………………………………………………
Only ).
1
.We, ………………………………………………………..……….. Bank having office at
………………………………………………………………………………..
.Bombay
(
hereinafter referred to as “the Bank” which expression shall include its successors and assigns ) at
the request and on behalf of “the Tenderer” hereby agree to pay to the Corporation without any
demur on first demand an amount not exceeding
Rs. ………….. (Rupees
…………………………………………………………. Only) against any loss or damage, costs,
charges and expenses caused to or suffered by “the Corporation” by reason of non performance
and fulfillment or for any breach on the part of “the Tenderer” of any of the terms and conditions
of the said “tender”.
2.
We,
…………………………………………………….. Bank further agree
that “the
Corporation” shall be sole Judge whether the said “Tenderer” has failed to perform or fulfill the
said “tender” in terms thereof or committed breach of any of the terms and conditions of “the
order” and the extent of loss, damage, cost, charges and expenses suffered or incurred or would
be suffered or incurred by “the Corporation” on account thereof and we waive in favour of “the
Corporation” all the rights and defenses to which we as guarantors and/ or “the Tenderer” may be
entitled to.
3.
We, ……………………………………………………… Bank further agree that the amount
demanded by “the Corporation” as such shall be final and binding on “the Bank” as to “the Bank”
54
to undertake to pay “the Corporation” the amount so demanded on first demand and without any
demur notwithstanding any dispute raised by “the Tenderer” or any suit or other legal
proceedings including arbitration pending before any court, tribunal or arbitrator relating thereto,
our liability under this guarantee being absolute and unconditional.
4.
We, ………………………………………………. Bank further agree with “the Corporation”
that “the Corporation” shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in
any manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said
“tender”/ or to extend times of performance by “the Tenderer” from time to time or to postpone
for any time to time any of the powers exercisable by “the Corporation” against “the Tenderer”
and to forbear to enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to “the tender” and we shall not
be relieved from our liability by reason of any such variation or extension being granted to “ the
Tenderer” or for any forbearance, act or omission on the part of “the corporation” or any
indulgence by “the Corporation” to “the tenderer” or by any such matter or things whatsoever
which under the law relating to sureties would but for this provision have the effect of relieving
us .
NOTWITHSTANDING anything hereinbefore contained, our liability under this Guarantee is
Restricted to Rs. …………………( Rupees ........................................ …………………………..
only). Our liability under this guarantee shall remain in force until expiration of six months from
the due date of opening of the said “tender”. Unless a demand or claim under this guarantee is
made on us in writing within said period, that is, on or before …………………………………..
all rights of “the Corporation” under the said guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved
and discharged from all liabilities thereunder.
We,………………………………………………………Bank further undertake not to revoke
this guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent of “the Corporation” in
Writing.
We,…………………………………………………………. Bank lastly agree that “the Bank” ‘s
liability under this guarantee shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of “the
Tenderer”.
“The Bank” has power to issue this guarantee in favour of “the Corporation” in terms of the
documents and/or the Agreement / Contract or MOU entered into between “the Tenderer” and
“the Bank” in this regard.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bank has executed this document on this ……………. ………….
Day of ………………………………………………………………………
For …………………………….. Bank
( by its constituted attorney )
( signature of a person authorised to sign
on behalf of “the Bank”)
55
SECTION II
SPECIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS
56
SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR STANDING WORKS
CONTRACT FOR MODERNISATION OF RETAIL OUTLETS/
CONTRUCTION OF NEW RETAIL OUTLETS
Quoted rate shall be applicable for any height, depth, level and thickness of wall etc unless
otherwise specified. Sales Building shall be generally ground floor and G+1 in some cases.
Samples of all materials will have to be approved by EIC before use.
List of approved make/ brand is attached to Unpriced (technical/ commercial) bid.
Decision of HPCL with regard to selection of make/ brand of material to be used shall be final.
All jobs to be carried out as per technical specification attached to Unpriced (technical/
commercial) bid. All IS Codes referred to shall be of Latest Edition.
1.0
SCOPE OF WORK
.
Civil works involves land development, WBM, Compound wall, Chain link fencing,
VDRCC, Pavers block driveways, Asphalted driveways, sales room building, kerb wall,
drains, earth filling, construction of pipeline trenches, rain water grid system, repairs and other
works in sales buildings, drive way and allied works etc.
.
.
2.0
0
Mechanical works such as testing & installation of tank, laying of pipelines, installation of
pumps, compressor etc., supply, fabrication & installation of Prefab canopies.
Electrical Works such as supplying and laying cables, panels, yard lighting, internal writing,
installation of DG set etc.
This tender is for modernisation of retail outlets / Contraction of New Retail Outlets in the
region/ state as mentioned in the tender .
PERIOD OF CONTRACT:
The rates once accepted shall be applicable for a period of one years from the date of placement
of order. The rates shall remain unchanged till the expiry of Contract and no Revision of Rates
shall be entertained from parties for any reason. Corporation shall have the option to extend the
standing contract at same rate for a further period of one year after taking party’s consent.
The contractors whose names shall be selected in the panel for above works shall have to station
their authorized representative in VASHI and shall have to keep qualified Engineers at work
sites for effective supervision.
4.0
COMPLETION PERIOD AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES :
Completion period shall be
specified in the call up letter/order issued for each site depending upon the scope & quantum of
the job at that site. Generally following completion time from the date of issuance of such call
up order will be followed by HPCL :
Major Rebuild involving construction of Sales Building, Canopy,
57
i.)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Driveway and allied jobs -4 months.
Sales building, Murum filling, WBM, Driveway, Pump installation
Jobs at new sites/ Existing sites: 3 months
Canopy/Driveway/Tank installation and allied jobs – 3 months
Only Canopy or only Drive way with pump island, installation of tanks and allied jobs 2 months
After issuance of the work order. Under some special circumstances, the
Corporation may advise postponement of commencement or carry out the work in stages, in
which case the time of completion shall be extended suitably depending upon the actual delay/
interruptions caused. The Corporation will not however be liable under any circumstances for
payment of compensations of any nature to the contractor for such delay or interruptions.
The liquidated damages for delay in completion of each individual work shall be 0.5% per week
delay or part thereof beyond schedule date of completion subject to maximum of 5% of
individual work order value.
If the Contractor fails to complete work within the completion period or does not show sufficient
progress as per time schedule fixed for completion of the work, the Corporation can terminate the
contract by giving 15 days notice by a registered letter and get the full or remaining job done
through any other Contractor at higher rate and recover the difference from the Contractor’s
pending bill / security deposit. If the work is done through any other Contractor at the same rate,
the Corporation shall in that event forfeit party’s initial security deposit and the party will not be
considered for future jobs.
The Contractor ,shall submit in writing to EIC any delay occuring due to reasons not attributable
to contractor EIC shall review such request if found tenable and may / may not give extension of
completion period depending on the merit of such claims. However shall not be entitled for any
additional claims / compensation of what so ever in nature on account of such extended period
given to the Contractor with out prejudice to the corporation rights. Any request for extension of
completion period beyond stipulated completion period shall not be considered by the
corporation.
5.0.
a)
DEALING WITH OUTSIDE PARTIES:
The
Contractor
should
purchase
al l
materials
from the
market
they require for the work allotted to them in case or credit in their own firms name only.
which
If any material has been purchase by the Contractor on credit and payments is not cleared,
Corporation on receipt of such complaint from any party can recover the amount from
Contractor’s pending bills or a security, deposit, on account of non –clearance of such
transactions where corporation’s name /dealings is likely to be adversely affected and may make
the payment to the concerned party.
Contractor in their own interest should purchase material from the authorized sources and should
fulfill all their obligations of all taxes etc. If the Corporation has reasons to believe that any
material has been brought to its premises from unauthorized sources, the corporation can refer the
matter to police for verification.
The Contractor can be debarred from Corporation and security deposit shall be forfeited for such
lapses.
58
COMMEENCEMENT OF WORK AND REFUSALS
The Contractor shall have to start the work within 15 days from date of issue of call up order or
advice to commence the work.
If the Contractor is unable to start the work due to preoccupation of Corporation’s work
elsewhere and accordingly inform promptly to the Manager – E&P, of his inability to take up the
work in hand and if the Corporation is satisfied, the initial date for commencement of work can
be extended by the Corporation.
c.
d.
7.0
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
If the Contractor does not start the work by the above stated period and if the Corporation is not
satisfied with the reasons for not starting the work in time or if Contractor refuses to carry out the
work due to any other reason, the corporation can cancel that work order by giving a registered
notice after the expiry of the specified period as per the order and the same work shall be carried
out by any other Contractor at his entire risk and cost and consequences.
In the event of two such cancellations for two different works during the contract period, the
initial Security Deposit shall be forfeited and the standing contract shall be cancelled forthwith.
Schedule of rates shall be read with work description, relevant specifications, and instructions to
tenders, other special terms and conditions including relevant drawings.
Anything contained to the contrary in the work description shall supersede the specification and
drawings
Anything contained to the contrary in the special Terms and Conditions, will supersede
instructions to tenderers, particular clauses of General Terms & conditions or clauses stated
elsewhere.
The corporation reserves the right to appoint more than one Contractor and distribute the works
among the Contractor as deemed necessary by the Corporation.
The quantum of work during the contract period can not be guaranteed by the Corporation and
will not be binding in any way what-so-ever.
8.0
SPECIAL CONDITIONS :
(i)
Since the work is to be carried out in running retail outlets also, the work is likely to be
hampered/ delayed due to operational reasons. No claims on account of the above and any other
reason whatsoever shall be entertained by the Corporation and work shall be completed by the
contractor within the stipulated period considering the above conditions also the Corporation shall
not pay any compensation whatsoever for idling of labour/ equipment.
(ii)
Acceptance of the facility / facilities by the Corporation does not constitute final completion of
the contract. The contract shall be deemed to be executed in full and final measurement certified
only when the contractor has fully discharged all his obligations in terms of all the contract
documents.
Facilities dismantled/Damaged while executing the works shall be restored to its original
condition without any extra cost the corporation.
59
9.0
TESTING OF MATERIALS :
Testing of adequate number of samples of various materials inline with relevant standards shall
be carried out by the Party at their cost. The details of tests to be carried out are given in the
attachment to this Section. The testing shall be carried out at an approved Laboratory. Wherever
applicable, party shall also submit manufacturer’s test Certificates.
10.0
PART RATE PAYMENT :
Sr.No.
Description
Payment Schedule
1.
Reinforcement steel
and structural steel
50% against delivery
Of material at site.
Balance after concreting
2.
Tiles
40% against delivery
Of material at site subject to
certification of Quality by
SIC.
Balance after laying
3.
Aluminium Doors/ Windows
25% against delivery
Of material at site
Balance after fixing
4.
Pipes
50% against delivery
Of material at site.
Balance after fixing
5.
DBs/ Panels
50% against delivery
Of material at site.
Balance after fixing
6.
Canopy roofing/false ceiling
materials
50% against delivery
Of material at site.
Balance after completion
The Contractor shall execute an Indemnity bond as approved by EIC, against any theft, loss or
damage to the materials. Losses arising out of any act shall be borne by the contractor.
The EIC reserves the right to satisfy himself on the quality/ quantity of the materials before
recommending payment. Manufacturer’s test certificate/Lab Certificate of materials asked for
shall be furnished by the Contractor as desired by ECI.
60
The project is subject to inspection by various audit / vigilance agencies of government of India/
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd., if any inspection of works is carried by such agencies.
Contractor shall extend his full cooperation to these agencies in examining records. Works etc.
On inspection by such agencies, if it is pointed out that Contractor has not carried out work
according to guidelines laid down in the tender document and also if any recoveries against some
items are pointed out therein, the same shall be recovered from Contractor’s R/A bills/final bill.
The items under dispute shall not be paid in full till inspection agency gives their No objection
report.
CEMENT
Cement required for execution of jobs contained in this tender shall be arranged by the contractor
at his own cost. Cement shall be 53 Grade OPC unless otherwise specified.
For all computation purposes, the theoretical cement consumption shall be considered as per
CPWD standards Penal recovery for under consumption of cement shall be @ Rs. 6000/- per MT.
The Contractor will be required to maintain a stock register for receipt, issuance and daily
consumption of cement at site. Cement shall be regulated on the basis of FIRST RECEIPT to go
as FIRST ISSUE. Cement not consumed within three months after bringing to site, shall not be
used and shall be removed from site with written permission of Engineer-in-Charge.
All the running bills as well as the final bills shall be accompanied by cement consumption
statements.
Contractor shall construct suitable temporary godown at site for storage of cement under his lock
and key. The Contractor will be fully responsible for safe custody of cement. HPCL will not
entertain any claims by the Contractor for theft, loss or damage to cement. Contractor shall not
remove from the site, cement, at any time without the consent of EIC.
STEEL
Entire quantity of reinforcement steel required for the projects shall be supplied by contractor.
HPCL shall not supply any steel and contractor’s quotation should include the cost of same
wherever necessary. The Contractor shall make arrangements.
The quantity of steel reinforcement or structural steel shall be calculated based on the theoretical
unit weight as per IS code. The quantity of steel shall be taken as the quantity required as per
design or as authorized by Architect / Consultant / HPCL’s Engineer including authorized lap
lengths/ chairs etc. No further claim towards additional wastage due to lap length / full length
bars/ binding wire or any other consideration shall be entertained.
For the purpose of Billing and Accounting only linear measurements will be taken any any
difference in weight based on linear measurement and actual weight shall be to contractor’s
account. Quoted rates shall be deemed to include the above and the wastage. No claim
whatsoever shall be entertained on account of wastage and difference in weight as referred to
above.
All binding wire required for tieing the reinforcement in position etc. will be supplied by the
Contractor. Cost of this binding wire and the labour to be included in the item.
61
Steel brought to site must have manufacturer’s test certificate. However, if felt necessary, EIC
reserves the right to get the reinforcement tested in a recognized approved laboratory at the risk
and cost of the contractor.
The Contractor will be required to maintain a register for recording details of steel
received, steel utilized and balance on any day.
In every case, it shall be Contractor’s responsibility to ensure quality of the steel procured
by them.
`WATER AND POWER :
Water and Power required for construction works and workmen shall be arranged by the
Contractor at his/ her own cost.
Contractor to assist the clients in obtaining the water/drainage connections for the Retail outlet by
submitting necessary application and work completion certificates etc.
All water proofing works included in the scope of the tender shall be carried out by specialized
agencies. Party to submit guarantee in suitable format for a period of 10 years. Similar guarantee
shall also be submitted for Anti Termite treatment.
Approved makes/ brands are specified in the tender for various materials to be used in the
construction. It is the responsibility of the party to ensure that materials of best quality and
genuine make are procured for use in works. Decision of HPCL with regard to selection of any of
the brands/makes stipulated in the tender shall be final.
In case of any ambiguities in the tender with regard to the terms and conditions and specifications
stipulated, the decision of HPCL shall be final and binding.
Retention Money: The condition regarding retention money is guided by clause no. 7C and
clause No. 11 of general terms and conditions. The defect liability period will be 12 months from
the date of completion.
INSPECTION BY HPCL OR HPCL AUTHORISED THIRD
AGENCY :
PARTY INSPECTION
HPCL & HPCL authorised Third Party Inspection Agency will have full power and authority
to inspect the works at any time wherever in progress, either on the site or at the Contractor’s
premises/ workshop of any person, firm or corporation where work in connection with the
contract may be in hand or where the materials are being or are to be supplied, and the Contractor
shall provide his full assistance to carryout such inspection. The Contractor shall, at all times
during the usual working hours and at all other times at which reasonable notice of the intention
of the HPCL’s Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in-Charge or representative of HPCL’s authorised
Third Party Inspection Agency to visit the works shall have been given to the Contractor, either
himself be present to receive orders and instructions, or have a responsible agent, duly accredited
in writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor’s agent shall be considered to
have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor himself
62
SECTION – III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND
TESTING OF MATERIALS
63
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION-CIVIL WORK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS- MATERIALS
GENERAL:
a.
All materials to be used in the execution of Civil & structural works shall be governed by the
requirements of this specification.
b.
Whenever any reference to IS codes is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision ( with
all amendments issued thereto ) as on the date of submission of the bid.
c.
Apart from the IS codes mentioned in particular in Various clauses of this , for a specific work
under consideration all other relevant codes regarding quality testing and/ or inspection
procedures shall be applicable. Reference to some of the codes in the various clauses of this
specification does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of other referred or relevant
codes.
d.
In case of any variation/ contradiction in provisions between IS codes and this specification, the
provisions given in this specification shall be followed with the approval of the Engineer in
Charge/ consultant / architect.
e.
All materials shall be of standard quality and shall be procured from renowned sources/
manufactures approved by the Architect / Consultant. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor, to get all materials approved prior to procurement and placement of order.
f.
Quality and acceptability of materials not covered under this specification shall be governed by
the relevant IS codes. In case IS code is not available for the particular material, other codes e.g.
BS or DIN or ASTM shall be considered. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge / consultant /
architect in this regard shall be final and binding on the contractor.
g.
Whenever asked for, the Contractor shall submit representative samples of materials to be client
for inspection and approval. Approval of any sample does not necessarily exempt the Contractor
from submitting necessary test reports for the approved materials, as per the specification /
relevant IS codes.
h.
The Contractor shall submit manufacture’s test reports on quality and suitability of any material
procured from them and their recommendation on storage, application, workmanship etc. for the
intended use. Submission of manufacturer’s test reports does not restrict the client/ consultant
from asking for fresh test results from an approved laboratory of the actual material supplied from
any approved manufacture/ source at any stage of execution of work.
i.
All costs relating to or arising out of carrying out the tests and submission of test reports and or
samples to the client/ consultant for approval during the entire tenure of the work shall be borne
by the Contractor and included in the quoted rates.
64
j.
Materials for approval shall be separately stored and marked, as directed by the client / consultant
and shall not be used in the works till these are approved. The Contractor at his own cost shall
immediately remove all rejected materials from the site.
1.1.0
CEMENT
SUPPLY:
Cement used shall be one of the following with prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge /
consultant / architect.
Grade 43 Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112.
Grade 53 Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12269.
Portland Stage Cement conforming to IS : 455.
Portland Pozzolana Cement conforming to IS : 1489.
Cement to be used shall be of the best quality from reputed brands like ACC/ Birla / Gujrat
Ambuja / L & T or any other equivalent as approved by the Client / consultant.
Unless otherwise specified ordinary Portland Cement of 43 grade conforming to IS : 8112 shall
be used for all concrete works.
Where specified, special cement like Sulphate resisting Portland cement ( conforming to IS :
8042-E ), Coloured cement shall be used.
Rapid hardening cement shall have strength in one day equal to that of OPC in 3 days. It shall be
used for products like Hume pipe, tiles, sleepers, and poles, prestressed and precast members. It
shall also be used for foundation, bridges, culverts, causeways, etc. where quick construction
activity is required however with prior permission of the consultant / architect. Test certificates
showing that the cement complies with the specifications must be submitted to the consultant.
Sulphate resistant cement should possess low heat of hydration, more compressive strength at 3, 7
and 28 days than OPC. It should be capable of withstanding attack of aggressive substances like
sulphate of sodium, magnesium, calcium, etc. which damage concrete structures. It shall be used
with prior approval for structures in or near sea water, where the soil conditions are aggressive,
where repeated cycles of drying and wetting occur and also for structures exposed to sulphate
attack like industrial drains, sewage pipes, foundations, bridge, dams. Tunnels. Test certificates
showing that the cement complies with the specifications must be submitted to the consultant.
Coloured cement shall be white or grey Portland cement mixed with pigment as specified in the
item of work, it shall comply with physical requirements of IS : 269/8112 and pigments shall be
inorganic oxide pigments either natural or synthetic in origin complying with the requirements of
B.S.: 1014 The pigments used for coloured cements shall be of approved quality and its quantity
and its quantity shall not exceed 10% of cement used in the mix. The mixture of pigment and
cement shall be properly ground to have a uniform colour and shade. The pigments shall have
such properties as to provide durability under exposure to sunlight and weather. The pigment
shall have the properly such that it is neither affected by the cement not detrimental to it.
In case more than one type of cement is used in any work, a record shall be kept showing the
location and type of cement used. Each type of cement shall preferably be obtained from one
65
constant source throughout the contract. Cement of different types shall not be mixed with one
another. Different brands of cement or the same brand of cement from different sources shall not
be used without prior notification or approval by client.
The cement shall be supplied to the site in original sealed bags, which shall be labeled with the
weight, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture, brand and type. Cement received in torn bags
shall not be used. Bags of cement that vary in weight by more than 3% shall not be accepted.
1.2.0
The Contractor shall maintain a daily record of cement received and consumed in an approved
form and copy shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge once a week.
Storage :
Cement bags shall be stored dry, leak proof, moisture proof and well-ventilated godowns built at
the cost of the Contractor. Cement of different types shall be stored in separate godowns or
separate compartments of a godown.
The floor of the godown shall be raised and shall consist of wooden planks resting on the base
prepared with dry bricks laid on edges. Stacking of cement bags shall have a clearance 150 to 200
mm above the floor and 450 mm from the wall.
Cement shall be stored in stocks, which are not higher than 10 bags avoid lumping due to
pressure and in such a manner as to permit easy access for inspection and identification.
The bags shall be kept close together in rows of two bags to reduce circulation of air as much as
possible. The bags shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion so as to lessen the danger of
topping.
‘ First in ’ ‘First out ’ rules shall be applied while removing the bags for use.
Cement stored during monsoons or for an unusually long period, shall be completely enclosed in
polythene sheet which shall cover the top of the stack. The Contractor shall ensure that the
polythene sheet is not damaged at any time during use. Storage under tarpaulins shall not be
permitted.
1.3.0
No stored cement bag shall be used after three months from the date of manufacture. Generally,
stacking and storing of cement shall be in accordance with Clause 3.2 of IS : 4082.
Quality of cement
The manufacture shall satisfy himself that the cement conforms to the relevant Indian standards
and if required, shall furnish a certificate to this effect to the purchase or his representative within
ten days of the dispatch of the cement.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the quantity of cement brought to work site. In case
the Contractor has any doubt regarding the quality of cement brought to work site, it is upto him
to have it tested at his own expense and make sure that the cement is of acceptable quality.
1.4.0. Testing
1.4.1
The Contractor shall submit test certificates furnished by the manufacture to client / consultant is
not convinced about the quality of cement, he can ask the Contractor to have the cement tested or
66
he can take samples in the presence of Contractor from cement bags stored at work site and
forward them to government for testing. Expenses towards such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
1.5.0. Sampling :
For one lot of 50 tonnes of cement, 2% of bags be picked out at random, from which one sample
of 15 kg shall be taken.
1.5.2
Samples for testing may be taken by the purchaser or his representative within one week of
delivery and all tests shall commence within one week of sampling.
When it is not possible to test the samples within one week, the samples shall be backed and
stored in airtight containers till testing.
Causes for rejection :
1.6.1
Cement not conforming to relevant specification shall be rejected by the client / consultant. The
Contractor, at his own expense shall immediately remove rejected cement from the work site.
1.6.2
Damaged or reclaimed or partly set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be removed
from the site.
1.6.3
The minimum requirements for any type of cement to be considered as acceptable are in table-A
TABLE A : PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT
Type of cement
Code NO.
Fineness by Blaine’s method
(sq. m / kg), min
Setting time(mins)
initial(More than)
Final(Less than)
Loss on ignition (Max %)
Insoluble Residue
( Max %)
Soundness ( Max)
Lechatelier ( mm)
Autoclave ( %)
Compressive Strength
*( Min) ( N / sq. mm)
7 days
28 days
OPC
33
Grade
IS:269
225
OPC 43
Grade
OPC 53
Grade
PPC
PSC
IS:8112
225
IS 12269
225
IS 1489
300
IS 455
225
30
600
5
4
30
600
5
2
30
600
4
2
10
0.8
10
0.8
10
0.8
30
600
5
{0.960 x
+4} x =% of
Pozzolana
10
0.8
22
33
33
43
37
53
22
31
30
600
4
2.5
10
0.8
22
-
67
. Compressive strength test shall be carried out on 70.70 x70.70 x 70.70
mm mortar cubes made from cement and sand (conforming to IS
650) mixed in the proportion 1:3.0
2.0.0
AGGREGATES
Aggregates for concrete shall be produced from approved source conforming to the specifications
of IS:383 and shall be chemically insert, clean, strong, durable, with limited porosity and free
from deleterious materials which cause corrosion of reinforcement or may impair the strength and
durability of concrete. Aggregates shall not contain water-soluble sulphur trioxide in excess of
0.1%. The chloride ion content of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed .06% and 0.02%
respectively by mass of dry aggregate. If either aggregate exceeds these limits the material may
still be considered acceptable by the Engineer provided that the total chloride ion concentration
derived from the aggregate is not grater than 0.35% by mass of the cement in the mix.
All aggregates shall comply with IS:2386 and IS:383 in respect of impurities and additionally
with the following :
a) Absorption
6% maximum by weight for ordinary construction and 2% maximum for water proof
construction.
b) Salt
1% maximum (equivalent anhydrous calcium percentage by weight of cement)
c) Shell
8% maximum by weight.
d) Carbonates
10% maximum by weight.
Unless otherwise specified fine aggregate shall be imply natural river sand for the purpose of
reinforced concrete work.
FINE AGGREGATE :
2.1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a
b
The maximum size of the sand particles shall be 4.75 mm and down graded.
The sand shall be free from adherent coatings and not contain harmful materials such as iron
pyrites, coal, mica, slit, clay, alkali, sea shell, organic impurities, loam, etc.
The maximum quantity of deleterious materials shall not exceed 5 percent and the limits specified
in table 1 of IS: 383 when tested in accordance with IS:2386 (part-2).
Aggregates, which are chemically reactive with alkalis of cement, shall not be used, as it will
induce cracking of concrete.
Slit and dust present in natural sand shall be limited to 8% by weight. In case it is more than 8% it
shall be washed at site with clean water. Presence of mica shall not be more than 1% by weight.
c
d
e
68
2.1.2
Grading
Fine aggregate with a fineness modulus value less than ‘2’ shall not be used for reinforced
concrete work. The natural sand used for RCC work shall have a grading conforming to one of
the three grading zones given in the following table (Table b). Fine aggregate conforming to
grade IV as per IS: 383 shall not be used for RCC works.
For coarse sand the grading of sand as determined by the method prescribed in IS: 2386 Part I
shall be within the limits of grading III given in Table B.
Stone dust shall be obtained by crushing hard stone and the grading shall be as determined by the
method prescribed in IS : 2386 Part I & II. It shall be within the limits of grading zone III. The
fineness modulus of stone dust shall not be less than 1.8. It shall not contain more than 8% of silt
as determined by field test with measured cylinder. The silt content is found out by keeping a
sample of stone dust without drying in 200 mm measuring cylinder. The quantity of the sample
shall be such that it fills the cylinder upto 10mm mark. Then clean water shall be added upto 150
mm mark. The mixture shall be stirred vigorously and the contents allowed to settle for 3 hours.
The height of slit visible as settled layer above the stone dust shall be expressed as percentage
more than 8% of silt shall be washed so as to being down the content within the allowable limit.
When grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading Zone of sieves, other than 600
micron IS sieve, by a total amount not exceeding 5%, it shall be regarded as falling within that
grading zone.
TABLE B: GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATE (AS PER IS: 383)
IS Sieve
Designation
10 mm
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
percentage by
weight passing
IS Sieve
Grading Zone
I
100
90-100
60-95
30-70
15-34
5-20
0-10
Grading Zone
II
100
90-100
75-100
55-90
35-59
8-30
0-10
Grading Zone
III
100
90-100
85-100
75-100
60-79
12-40
0-10
Grading Zone
IV
100
95-100
95-100
90-100
80-100
15-50
0-15
Sampling and testing
Fine aggregate shall be subjected to inspection and testing.
The method of sampling for test shall be in accordance with IS: 2430
Samples of fine aggregate for testing shall be collected from transportation units or stack or
stockpiles. Each sample shall be packed separately and dispatched to the testing laboratory.
69
Packing and marking of samples shall be done in accordance with clause 6.0 of IS: 2430.
The Contractor shall furnish test results of samples as may be required by the client/ consultant.
Testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 2386 (Parts- 1 to 8).
Storage
a.
b.
c.
d.
Aggregate shall be stored on a hard surface or a well designed platform of concrete, timber, metal
or any other approved material so as to prevent the mixture of clay, dust, vegetable and other
foreign matter.
Storing and stacking of fine aggregate shall be done in accordance with clause 3.5 of IS:4082
While stacking, the aggregate shall not form pyramids resulting in segregation of different size
particles. The stacks shall be regular.
Unless otherwise specified or necessitated by site conditions, stacking of fine aggregate shall be
sufficiently away from that of coarse aggregate.
Coarse aggregate shall mean aggregate of which not less than 95% by weight is retained on 4.75
mm mesh IS sieve of IS:2430 and shall conform to IS:383.
2.2.0
COARSE AGGREGATE :
2.2.1
General Requirements:
Coarse aggregates shall be machine-crushed stone of black trap or equivalent black hard stone
and shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean or procured from quarries approved by the
client/consultant. Generally coarse aggregate shall be cubical in shape and not flake or elongated.
Aggregates shall be free from injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces, reactive silica, alkali,
harmful salt, organic matters and other deleterious materials.
Coarse aggregate to be used for reinforced cement concrete work shall not contain any material
liable to attack the steel reinforcement.
The maximum quantity of deleterious materials shall not exceed 5 percent of the weight of coarse
aggregate and the limits specified in Table 1 of IS:383 when tested in accordance with
IS:2386(Part-2).
The amount of fine particles occuring in the free state or as loose adherent shall not exceed 1%
when determined by laboratory sedimentation tests as per IS:2386.
In selecting the aggregates the Contractor shall satisfy and ensure that the source is suitable for
regular supply and a watch shall be maintained that the particle shape and grading remain
reasonably uniform throughout the progress of work.
The Contractor shall arrange to supply coarse aggregates in single size, for each nominal size,
conforming to the grading given in Table 2 of IS:383. The single sizes shall be combined in
suitable proportion to get desired overall grading of aggregates. The client/consultant at his
discretion, may allow the use of “Graded Aggregate” of nominal size, to conform to the grading
specified in Table 2 of IS:383.
2.2.2
Maximum Size :
70
The maximum size of aggregates shall not be great than one quarter of the maximum thickness of
the member so as to surround all reinforcement. For heavily reinforced concrete members, the
nominal size of aggregate shall be 5 mm less than the minimum clear distance between the
reinforcement main bar or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to the reinforcement whichever is
smaller.
In reinforced concrete work, unless otherwise specified, nominal maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be 20 mm and down.
2.2.3
Storage :
a.
Generally, storage of coarse aggregate shall conform to clause 3.5 of IS:4082. Aggregate shall be
stored at site on a hard dry patch of ground, preferable levelled and rolled.
Aggregate of various Sizes shall be stored in separate stockpiles with height not exceeding 1 m to
prevent coning or segregation. A bottom layer of coarse aggregate 100 mm deep shall be
undisturbed while removing the material for use.
If the aggregate are stored at site for a long time, it shall be sieved before use, to remove dust, if
directed by the consultant.
b.
c.
3.0.0
STEEL REINFORCEMENT :
3.1.0
Supply :
Steel reinforcement for concrete shall be round/ribbed bars, unless otherwise specified and shall
comply with the following grades.
High strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS: 1786. If specified, tested
quality
high
yield strength deformed corrosion resistant steel ( CRS) bars from TATA ( TISCON- 50 CRS) or
SAIL ( HCR-REBARS Gr.M ) conforming to IS: 1786 for mechanical properties with improved
corrosion resistance and bond strength shall be used.
All steel shall be procured from original procedures. No re-rolled steel shall be incorporated in
the work. Only new steel shall be delivered to the site and shall be free of mill scale, loose rust,
grease oil, paint or any other deleterious materials which reduce or destroyed bond.
3.2.0
Measurement of Reinforcement :
Measurement relating to nominal mass, dimensions and tolerances of various types steel shall
conform to relevant IS codes.
Reinforcement shall be measured in lengths of bar as actually placed in position on standard
weight basis, no allowances being made in the weight for rolling margin, Wastage, chairs and
binding wire shall not be measured. Authorised overlaps and splices shall only be measured. Rate
quoted shall include the cost of welding if specified.
3.3.0
Testing :
Test certificates from manufacturer, mill certificates and certificates of origin shall be submitted
for each consignment. Additional tests required shall be done as recommended by the client/
consultant at the Contractor’s own cost. An accredited laboratory shall carry out testing. Any
reinforcement so sampled and tested which fails to comply with the specifications shall be
71
rejected and the whole batch shall be removed from the site immediately. The Contractor shall
have no claim for bars mutilated in obtaining test samples.
3.4.0
Sampling :
Sampling shall be done in accordance with relevant IS codes. For every 40 tonnes of steel at least
one test shall be done.
CRS reinforcing bars shall conform to the physical properties of IS:1786. In addition when tested
for corrosion resistance as per the standard ASTM method such as salt spray test ( B.117.90).
Potentio Dynamic Polaristion measurement test (G.5.78). Atmospheric Corrosion test (G.50.76)
and sulphur-di-oxide chamber test (G.87.84) shall exhibit corrosion resistance index of minimum
1.5.CRS (deformed) bars should either be butt or lap welded as per recommended practice of
IS:9417. For best results basic coated electrodes containing copper and/ or nickel shall be used.
The chemistry of CRS should be as given below :
Carbon
Sulphur(s)
Phosphorus(p)
S+P
Silicon
Corrosion
Resistant elements
3.5.0
-0.15% max
-0.05% max
-0.12% max
-0.17% max
-0.45% max
-0.5% max
Binding Wire :
The reinforcement shall be securely bound wherever bars intersect or wherever required with 16
or 18 gauge ( 1.63 mm or 1.22 mm ) annealed steel wire conforming to IS:280.
3.6.0
Mechanical splices :
Mechanical connections for spilicing reinforcement bars in congested locations shall be used only
with the approval of consultant/Engineer-in-Charge. Patented couplers as manufactured by Usha
Martin Industries Ltd. ( CCL bar grips) and BBR India Ltd.(BBR SWIF) shall be used wherever
mentioned in the drawings. The couplers shall be attached to the reinforcement bars by forging,
hydraulic pressing or screw couplers in special circumstances may be permitted. All operations
relating to reinforcement coupling shall be done using supplier’s patented machine / equipment
and in the presence of the supplier’s representative. The Contractor shall submit relevant trade
literature, mil certificates, certificate of origin and letters of approval for each proposed
application. A sample of each type of mechanical coupler shall be submitted for testing and
approval prior to the use of any coupler in the works.
3.7.0
Welding electrodes :
Electrodes used for welding of steel bars shall be ordinary mild steel grade 2 electrodes
conforming to IS:814 and shall be the quality and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The work
shall be carried out as strictly as per IS:2751 and IS:9417.
3.8.0
Causes of Rejection :
72
Steel reinforcement, not conforming to relevant specifications, shall be rejected by the
client/consultant. Every bar shall be inspected before assembling on the work and defective,
brittle or brunt bar shall be rejected. Cracked ends of bars shall be discarded. The Contractor at
his own expenses shall immediately remove rejected steel from the work site.
3.9.0
Storage :
Steel reinforcement shall be handled and stored in a manner that bending or distortion of the bars
is avoided and corrosion of steel is prevented. They shall be stored in such a manner that they are
not in direct contact with the ground ( at least 150 mm clear above ground ). In case of long
storage, a coat of cement wash shall be given to the reinforcing steel to prevent any scaling or
rusting. Any reinforcement, which is certified as corroded by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall either
be immediately withdrawn from site or stand blasted and coated with cement slurry. No extra
payment shall be made for sand blasting and cement coating. Bars of different classifications and
size shall be stored separately. Generally, storage of reinforcements shall be in accordance with
clause 3.7 of IS:4032.
4.0.0
WATER :
Water used for various works shall conform to IS:456.
4.1.0
General Requirements :
Water used for both mixing and curing of concrete/ brickwork /plaster as well as for washing
aggregate shall be potable and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials like alkalis,
acids, oils salts, sugar, organic materials, vegetable growth or other substances which are likely to
affect the strength or durability of concrete and other construction materials. Before starting any
concreting / brickwork / plaster work and wherever the source of water changes, the water shall
be tested for its acceptability for use in concrete etc. by the methods given in IS : 3025. No water
shall be used until tested and found satisfactory and cost of all such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Hard and bitter water shall generally be found unsuitable for curing mortar and concrete.
Water for use in mixing with cement shall neither be hotter than 250C nor colder than 50C at the
time mixing.
Whenever temperature controlled concrete is specified, the Contractor may establish an ice
making plant of required capacity at site.
Water used for curing shall not produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
surface. It shall be free of elements that significantly affect the hydration reaction. Presence of
tannic acid or iron compounds in water is objectionable.
Acceptance Criteria :
73
Water to be used, shall satisfy the following :
4.2.1
To neutralise 200 ml sample of water, using phenobhihalein as an indicator, it should be require
more than 2 ml of 0.1 normal NaOH.
4.2.2
To neutralise 200 ml sample of water, using methyl orange as an indicator, it should not require
more than 10 ml of 0.1 normal HCL4.2.3. It should not contain solids by weight in excess of the
following :
Organic
Inorganic
Sulphates
Chlorides
200 mg/liter
3000 mg/liter
500 mg/liter
1000 mg/liter for RC work and
2000 mg/liter for other works
Suspended Matter 2000 mg/litre
The pH value of water shall be between 6 and 8. If required by the Engineer-in-Charge it shall be
tested by comparison with distilled water. Comparison shall be made by means of standard
cement tests for soundness, time of setting and mortar strength by 30 minutes or more or decrease
of more than 10% in strength of mortar prepared with water sample when compared with the
results obtained with mortar prepared with distilled water shall be sufficient cause for rejection of
water under test.
4.3.0. Sample for Testing :
The samples of water taken for testing shall represent the water proposed to be used, with due
account being paid to seasonal variation. The samples shall not receive any treatment before
testing other than that envisaged in the regular supply of water proposed for use. The sample shall
be stored in a clean container. Test shall be carried out only once for one particular source.
Testing shall be done as per IS:3025 (Relevant parts).
4.4.0. Storage :
Storage of water shall generally conform to IS:4082, whenever water is to be covered to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge to prevent contamination.
ADMIXTURES
Admixtures shall be used in concrete, mortar plaster etc. as specified in the schedule of items and
/ or drawing only after the product is approved by the client / consultant. The Contractor is bound
to furnish all such information like dosage, method of application, chloride content, etc. required
to decide on the suitability of the admixture. All required tests should be carried out at the
instructions of the client at no extra cost.
Use of admixture being a specialised job, shall be carried out strictly as per manufacture’s
recommendations.
74
General Requirements :
Admixture used shall conform to the following relevant IS codes and shall be purchased from
reputed manufactures as approved by client / consultant. In reinforced concrete, the chloride ion
of any admixture used shall not exceed 2% by weight of the admixture as determined in
accordance with IS:6925 and the total chloride ion in all admixture used in concrete mi shall not
exceed 0.83% by weight of cement. The addition of calcium chloride to concrete containing
embedded metal will not be permitted under any circumstances.
Accelerating Admixtures conforming to IS:9103 & 2645. It shall be in liquid state with a specific
gravity of 1.3 and complying with ASTM C-494 type E. it shall accelerate the setting and
hardening of the concrete mix thereby achieving high early ago strength. It shall be from CICO or
equivalent with all types of cement.
Retarding Admixture conforming to IS :9103. it shall be liquid state with a specific gravity of
1.22 and complying with ASTM C-494 type B&D,CRD-C87 type B&D, BS:5075 part 1. it shall
be added to the concrete mix during the mixing process along with water and aggregates. No
extension of normal mixing time is necessary. It shall delay the initial and final setting time. It
shall help to spread the heat of hydration over a longer period of time. It shall give a highly
workable concrete with a low W /C ratio. It shall be from CICO, Feb Roffe or equivalent and be
used at amount of acceleration of hardening required. It should be compatible with all types of
cement.
Air-entraining Admixture conforming to IS:9103.
Water-reducing admixtures conforming to IS:9103. Only naphthalene based water-reducing
admixture / plasticizers shall be permitted.
Integral waterproofing admixture conforming to IS:2645. It shall be from Feb Roffe’s Roff
Hyseal, Roff Hyproof, Algiproof or equivalent. It shall be used as an excellent cement admixture
in all types of concrete / plaster mortars, pointing mortars, masonry works, guniting works and
pressure grouting works. It shall improve resistance of the surface to weathering and chemical
attacks. It shall be no- toxic so as to use for waterproofing in water tanks, reservoirs, tanks, etc.
Product information :
5.2.1. The Contractor shall further provide the following concerning each admixture to the client /
consultant.
a.
Optimum dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage.
b.
Chemical names of the main ingredients in the admixture.
c.
The chloride ion content expressed as percentage by weight of admixture.
d.
Whether or not the admixture leads to entrapment of when used in the manufacture’s
recommended dosage and if so, to what extent.
Where two or more admixture is proposed to be used in any one mix, the manufacture’s written
confirmation of their compatibility.
75
There would be no increase in risk of the reinfo4rcement or other embodiments as a result of using the
admixture.
Sampling :
5.3.1. Sampling for testing shall be done in accordance with clause 4.1 of IS:9103 for liquid admixture
and clause 4.2 of IS:9103 for non-liquid admixtures.
5.3.2. Samples shall be packed in moisture-proof airtight containers.
5.3.3. Sampling of integral waterproofing compound shall be done as given in IS:2645.
5.4.0. Testing :
For checking the physical properties of any admixture, tests shall be carried out as detailed in
clause 3 of IS:9103. Results shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1 of IS:9103.
For air entraining admixture, tests shall be carried out as agreed to between the client and
consultant. And the manufacture. Except where resistance to freezing and thawing and to
disruptive action of de-icing salts is necessary, the air content of freshly mixed concrete in
accordance with the pressure method given in IS:1199 shall not be more than 2% higher than that
of the corresponding control mix and in any case not more than 3% of the test mix.
For integral waterproofing compound, tests shall be carried out as per methods given in IS:2645.
Uniformity tests on the admixture are essential to compare qualitatively the composition of
different samples taken from batch to batch or from the same batch at different times.
All tests relating to concrete and admixture shall be conducted periodically at an independent
laboratory and compared with the data given by the manufacture
5.5.0. Storage :
5.5.1
Admixture shall be stored in moisture-proof, airtight containers.
5.5.2
Storage shall in general conform to IS:4082.
6.0.0
FORMWORK
6.1
General requirements:
6.1.1
Shuttering for concrete work below ground level shall be of wrought formwork and that for
concrete work in superstructure shall be of fine formwork.
6.1.2
Formwork shall be of Marine Plywood, timber, steel and fiberglass of suitable thickness capable
of resisting damage to the contact faces under normal conditions of erecting firms, fixing steel
and placing concrete. For designated areas prominently in public view the choice of material shall
be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Where timber is used, it shall be of best quality, first class hardwood, well-seasoned, of medium
grain and free from sap, shekes, worm holes, wraps or other surface defects of all kinds. It shall
be wooden parking of 30mm minimum thickness with or without steel lining. The timber used
76
shall not be so dry as to absorb water from concrete and swell or bulge nor so green or wet as to
shrink after erection. The timber shall be properly swan and planned on the sides and surface
coming in contact with concrete. Wooden formwork with metal sheet lining or steel angles shall
be permitted. The surface of timer shuttering that would come in contact with concrete shall be
wetted and coated with shop solution before concreting is done. Alternatively coat of raw linseed
oil or oil of approved manufacture may be applied in place of soap solution.
Where plywood is used, it shall be of best quality, resin bonded and waterproof. Formwork shall
be minimum 12 mm thick shuttering quality plywood conforming to IS:4990 and of make
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable stiffeners and walers shall be provided depending
on the shuttering design. It shall be stable and not liable to scrap when exposed to sun and rain or
wetted during concreting.
Where steel framework is used, it shall be made out of appropriate gauge steel sheets with proper
framework to ensure perfect surfaces. It shall be made of 3 mm thick black sheets stiffened with
angle iron frame. The surface that would come in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly
cleaned and either soap solution or row li8iseed oil shall be applied.
Fiberglass formwork shall be of approved quality and standard.
6.1.3
The forms shall be true to dimensions and sizes. The props used on the work shall be of such
type, which can afford finer adjustments for levels, etc. and insure fully stability.
6.1.3.1. Wherever applicable, selection of suitable timber for formwork shall be made based on the
following relevant standards :
a)
7.0.0
Specification for ballies for general purposes as IS:3337. Specification for plywood for
concrete shuttering work as per IS:4990.
STRUCTURAL STEEL :
All material shall be new and shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of
equivalent or higher grade or alternative materials will be considered only in very special cases
subject to the approval of client/ consultant.
7.1.0
General Requirements :
All structural steel sections shall conform to IS:2062 unless otherwise specified and shall be
clearly rolled to proper dimensions and weight subject to permissible tolerances as per IS: 1852.
The finished materials shall be reasonably free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations rough are
imperfect edges and all other harmful defects and shall have a smooth finish. The material shall
be a free from loose mill scale, rust pits or other defects affecting the strength and durability.
Structural steel work shall be painted by applying to coats of Zink Phosphate primer conforming
to relevant IS and 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint ( Conforming to IS:2933 ) or aluminium paint
(conforming to IS:2339). However, steel shall be galvanised, if so required by the Client /
Consultant.
Normal hexagonal nuts and bolts shall conform to IS:3138-1966. high strength structural bolts
shall confirm to IS:3757. Countersunk bolts shall confirm to either IS:8352 or IS:8353 depending
77
on the type of bolt. Black bolts, nuts and screws shall be in accordance with IS:1363 for Black
hexagonal with nuts of 6 to 39 mm and black hexagon screw of 6 to 24 mm and IS:1364 and
IS:1367 for other sizes.
Hot rolled rivet bars shall conform to IS:1148 and high tensile steel rivet bars for structural
purposes shall conform to IS:1149.
Welding electrodes shall conform to IS:814 and approval of welding procedure shall be as per
IS:823.
Node connectors for space frame shall be Octagonal or Spherical in shape. It shall a minimum
tensile strength as specified in the bills of Quantities. Minimum elongation shall be 7% and
hardness 170-240 BHN. The nodes machined out of solid bars shall conform to IS:2062 and the
casing shall be as per IS:1030.
The following variety of steel shall be used for structural purposes.
ST- 42S: It shall be used for all types of structures ( reverted and bolted) including htose
subjected to dynamic loading and where fatigue, wide fluctuations of stresses, reversal of stresses
and great restraint are involved. It shall be suitable for welded structures provided that the
thickness of the material does not exceed 20 mm.
ST-42W: Fusion welding quality steel, conforming to IS:2062 shall be used for structures subject
to dynamic loading where welding is employed for fabrication and where fatigue, wide
fluctuation of stresses, reversal of stresses and great restraints are involved.
Structural steel tubes (ERW) used for building construction shall be hot finished tubes
conforming to IS:1161/ IS:1239/ IS:806. tubes shall be designated by their nominal bore and
shall be classified as light, medium and heavy as per IS:1161 tubes of thickness lower than light
tubes shall not be permitted.
Unless mentioned otherwise, fusion welding quality steel ST-42W shall be used for all the
structural steel works and tubes shall be YST 21 conforming to IS:806.
The chemical and mechanical properties for structural steel shall be as stated below :
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF STEEL
Steel Designation
Maximum percentage
Carbon
Sulphar
Phosphorous
ST-42W
0.23
0.06
0.06
ST-42S
0.25/0.28
0.06
0.06
ST-42O
0.07
78
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF STEEL
Steel
Class of
product
Type
ST-42-W
(Fusion
welding
quality &
ST-42-S
(Standard
quality)
ST-42-Owner
(Ordinary
quality)
Steel Nominal
Tensile
thickness / dia strength
mm
kg/ mm
Plate
selections
(For
example,
angles,
tees,
beams, channels
etc.) and flats
Bars
(round,
square
and
Hexagonal)
Plate sections ( for
example angles,
tees,
beams,
channels, etc.) and
flats
Yield
stress
min.
kg/mm
%
elongation
26
23
24
23
42 to 54
23
23
Below 10 only
bend test shall be
required Over 10 42 to 54
mm upto 20 mm
42 to 54
Over 20 mm
26
23
24
23
42 to 54
26
23
42 to 54
26
23
Below 6 mm only
bend test shall be
required. 6 mm
and upto 20 mm
Over 20 upto 40 42 to 54
mm Over 40 mm
42 to 54
Below 6 only
bend test shall be
required.
6 mm and above
Bars
(round, Below 10 mm
square
and only bend test
Hexagonal)
shall be required.
10 mm and above
7.2.0
Test certificate :
7.2.1
When the steel is supplied by the Contractor, test certificate of the manufacturer shall be obtained
according to IS: 2062 and other relevant Indian Standards. Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s
certificates, the Consultant/ architect may ask for testing of material in approved test laboratory.
The test results shall satisfy the requirements of the relevant Indian Standards. Whenever quality
certificates are missing or incomplete or where material quality differs from standard
specifications, the Contractor shall conduct all appropriate tests as directed by the consultant /
architect at his own cost. Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test
results do not comply with relevant IS standard shall not be used.
7.3.0
Storage :
79
Storage of structural steel shall be as per IS: 4082. Steel materials supplied by Contractor shall be
marked for identification and each lot shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s quality certificate,
conforming to chemical and mechanical characteristics as per relevant IS codes. All steel
furnished by suppliers shall be checked, sorted out, straightened and arranged by grade and
quantities in stores.
Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots inside a dry and
enclosed room in compliance with IS:816 and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Each lot of
electrode, bolts nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s test certificate.
8.0.0
AC SHEET & ACCESSORIES
8.1.0
General requirements :
8.1.1
The asbestos cement sheets used for roofing and cladding shall be plain corrugated or semicorrugated sheets from Everest or approved make conforming to IS:459.
8.1.2
It shall be manufactured by reinforcing Asbestos to cement in such a manner that every fibre is
coated with fine particles of cement to ensure maximum strength, it shall be alkali resistant and
anti-corrosive. It should not break during transportation, handling, laying and shall be noninflammable non-organic. It shall be resistant having high tensile strength and high slenderness
ratio.
8.1.3
The minimum nominal thickness of sheets shall be 6 mm, having covering efficiency of about
90% and weight 1518 kg/sqm. The permissible bending stress shall be 130 kg/sqm.
8.1.4
The accessories shall be same thickness that of AC sheets. They shall be suitable for the type of
sheet and location. They shall be from approved manufacture and free from any defect.
8.1.5
All fixing accessories shall conform to IS:1626. The diameter of the bolts shall not be less than
8mm. The J-bolts shall be at least 90mm longer at lap points of sheets and 75mm longer at other
points than the depth required to hook the bolt to the purlin. The galvanised iron washers shall be
25mm in diameter and 1.6mm thick. The bitumen washer shall be 35mm in diameter and 1.5mm
thick.
8.1.6
Bridges shall be of type specified in the schedule such as “one piece plain angular”, “plain wing
adjustable”, ”Serrated adjustable”, ‘Close fitting adjustable” or “Northlight two pieces” adjustable
and appropriate for the corrugated sheets used.” plain wing angular” type of ridges can be used
only if the scope of the roof is between 26 and 30 degrees. Ridges, hip section and other
accessories shall be of the same manufacture as that of sheets used for the roof unless otherwise
permitted by the Client/ Consultant.
8.1.7
The sheets shall have rectangular shape, corrugations true and regular, edges straight and clean,
smooth surface on exposed side and free from cracks and visible defects, holes, deformation,
chipped edges or otherwise damage.
8.1.8
All the AC sheets shall be painted with 3 coats of lime wash on the underside unless otherwise
specified.
8.1.9
Water absorption shall not exceed 28 percent of dry weight.
80
8.2.0
Testing :
Testing of asbestos cement products shall be done in accordance with the methods prescribed in
IS:5913.
8.3.0
Storage :
Storage of AC sheets and accessories shall in general conform to IS:4082. The materials shall be
handled and stored in the manner as not to damage the same. AC sheets shall be stacked on a firm
and levelled ground, laid on wooden battens according to the approved stacking methods and/ or
instructions of the manufacturer. They shall be protected from damage and when they are to be
stacked for a longer period, they shall be stored under cover.
9.0.0
GALVANISED IRON SHEET :
Galvanised iron sheets shall be from TATA or equivalent as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
9.1.0
General requirements :
9.1.1
G.I. Sheets used for roofing and cladding shall generally conform to the requirements prescribed
in IS:277 and shall be of the best quality duly approved by the Client / Consultant.
9.1.2
The base metal for galvanised sheets and coils shall be hot or cold rolled mild steel conforming to
IS:513. The sheets shall be free from cracks, spilt edges, twist, surface flaws, etc.. They shall be
clean, bright and smooth. The galvanizing shall be uninjured and in perfect condition. The sheets
shall show no sign of rust or white powdery deposits on the surface. The corrugation shall be
uniform in depth and pitch and parallel to the sides.
9.1.3
Minimum thickness of GI sheets to be used roofing shall be 0.63 mm thick (24 gauge) unless
noted otherwise in the drawings or in the schedule of items.
9.1.4
Unless otherwise mentioned in the schedule, the necessary accessories like flashing, ridging,
capping, gable end corner piece, barge boards etc. shall be made out of 20 gauge ( 1 mm
minimum ) galvanized sheets.
9.1.5
All fixing accessories shall conform to the requirements specified in IS:730.
9.2.0
Testing :
9.2.1
Testing shall be done in accordance with the provisions prescribed in IS:277.
9.3.0
Storage
9.3.1
Storage of GI sheets and accessories shall in general conform to IS:4082.
10.0.0 COLOUR COATED METTALIC SHEET AND ACCESSORIES
11.1.0 General requirements :
81
10.1.1 Colour coated sheets shall be made out of cold or hot rolled MS sheets conforming to IS:513
galvanised as per IS :277 and shall be of the best quality.
10.1.2 Colour coating requirements shall be in accordance with relevant Indian or foreign standards
ensuring a perfect and integral chemical bond between the base metal and the polymer coat.
10.1.3 The sheets shall be free from cracks, twist, surface flaws, spilt edges and any other defects which
could impair the strength and quality of the material.
10.1.4 The profile of the sheets shall be uniform, smooth, regular and true to shape.
10.1.5 The colour shades shall be consistent and free from visible defects.
10.1.6 Unless mentioned otherwise all necessary accessories shall be duly approved by the Client /
Consultant.
10.2.0 Sampling :
10.2.1 Representative samples of the product shall be kept in the office of the client for periodic checks
by Client / Consultant on compliance of quality of material actually used for the work.
10.3.0 Storage :
11.3.1 Storage of colour coated sheets and accessories shall in general conform to IS:4082 and as per
manufacturer’s specifications.
11.0.0 STONES
11.1.0 STONES FOR MASONRY :
11.1.1 General requirements :
Generally, the stone to be used shall conform to the requirements of IS:1597 ( part-1 ) and shall
be specified variety such as Granite, Trap stone, Quartz, sandstone or any other type locally
available good hard stones.
Stones used shall be strong, sound durable, dense, compact, close grained, homogeneous, fire
resistant and free from cracks, flaws or defects, segregation, seams, weathered portions and other
structural defects or imperfections tending to affect their soundness and strength and shall be
procured from quarries approved by the consultant.
Stones used shall be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. The length of stone shall not
exceed three times the height and the breadth on the base shall not be grater than 3 / 4” of the
thickness of wall not less than 150 mm. the height of stone may be upto 300 mm.
Stones shall be free from rounded, worn or weathered surfaces or skin or coating which prevents
the adherence of mortars.
Stones to be used as headers, quoins, copings, etc. shall comply with the requirements of facing
and haearting as may be relevant.
82
Stones shall be non-porous and when tested in accordance with IS:1124 shall show less than 5%
water absorption of its dry weight when soaked in water for 24 hours.
Dressed and worked stones shall strictly follow the recommended dimensions given in Table 1 of
: IS:1127 depending on the purpose of work.
For specific use (i.e. exposure to chemical fume, fire hazard etc. ) type of stone shall strictly
conform to the recommendations of Table 2 of IS:1597 (part 1) or as directed by the Client
/Consultant.
Quoin Stone or Corner Stone :
For random rubble masonry ( un-coursed and brought to course), quoin stone shall not be less
than 0.03 m3 in volume.
For squared rubble (coursed) masonry, the height of the quoin shall be same as the course height
and shall not be less than 450 mm in any direction.
Hearting and Backing Stone :
For random rubble masonry (un-coursed and brought to course) the hearting or interior filling of a
warface shall consist of rubble stones not less than 150mm in any direction, carefully laid,
hammered down to proper position.
For squared rubble (coursed ) masonry the hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist
of flat beded stone, carefully laid on their proper bedsin mortar.
Through stone or Bond Stone :
One through stone shall be provided for every half a square metre of facing, evenly distributed in
a staggered pattern.
They shall have about 0.03 sqm in face area and shall have a tailing for the full width of the
masonry when the width of masonry is 600 mm or less.
If the masonry wall is over 600 mm thick, a line of headers overlapping each other by at least 150
mm shall be laid right through the wall from the face to the back.
The length of the interior headers shall not be less than 450 mm and their average cross sectional
area shall not be less than 0.025 sqm.
Bond stone shall be distinctly marked on its face during construction for subsequent verification.
Sampling :
Sampling of stones including quoins and headers to be used in the work shall be got approved by
the Client/ Consultant before the work is started and such samples be maintained in the site
engineer’s office for any subsequent inspection.
Testing :
83
For compressive strength, test pieces shall be made from selected samples in cubical or
cylindrical shape. The diameter or lateral dimension of a test sample shall not be less than 50 mm
and the ratio of height to diameter or height to lateral dimension shall be 1:2. Compressive
strength and transverse strength test (if required) on stone samples shall be carried out in the
manner specified in IS:1121.
Water absorption test shall be carried out, if directed by the consultant, as per IS:1124.
Tests for durability and weathering shall be done, if directed by the consultant, as per IS:1126 and
IS:1125 respectively.
The working of stones to the required sizes and their dressing shall be carried out as per IS:1127
AND IS:1129.
KOTA /SHAHABAD/ CUDDAPAH/ GRANITE STONE :
Kota/ Shabad/ Cuddapah / Granite stone blocks / slabs/ tiles to be used for flooring, stairs, dados,
skirting, lining, veneering etc. shall conform to the requirements specified in the schedule of
items.
12.1.1 General requirements :
The natural stone slabs shall be procured from selected quality / stock as specified in schedule of
items.
These shall be hard, sound, dense and of homogeneous texture and free form cracks, decay,
weathering, soft veins and flaws.
They shall be hard and machine-cut of requisite thickness along planes parallel to the natural bead
of stone and shall be of uniform size and colour as required.
The exposed surface of stone slabs shall be machine polished to a smooth, even and true plane
and the edges shall be chiseled to half its depth, true and square to ensure uniform width of joint.
Marking :
Each type of stock blocks, slabs and tiles supplied at site shall bear the manufacturer’s
identification marks or initials.
Sampling and Testing :
a.
Samples shall be selected and tested separately for each lot for determining its conformity or
otherwise to the requirements of the specification.
b.
The number of blocks / slabs/ tiles to be selected for sampling shall depend upon the size of the
lot and shall be in accordance with Table-2, IS:1130.
c.
Contractor shall produce a certificate from the supplier stating that the blocks, slabs and titles
supplied, company with the relevant Indian Standards and shall submit it to Client / Consultant.
84
d.
Tests shall be carried out as per methods described in IS:1124 and IS:1122, as applicable.
12.1.4 Causes for rejection :
Stone slabs not conforming to the size, colour, texture and other criteria mentioned above shall be
rejected by the Client / Consultant.
13.0.0 BRICKS
13.1.0 BRICKS FOR MASONRY :
13.1.1 General requirements :
a.
Bricks for masonry in foundation, walls and other locations shall be hand or machine moulded
and made from suitable soil and kiln burnt. They shall have regular and uniform size and colour,
sharp, strength and right angled edges and deep cherry red and copper colour, uniformity well
burnt throughout but not over-burnt. They shall have smooth rectangular faces with parallel sides
and sharp corners. Generally, they shall conform to IS:1077
b.
They shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime.
c.
They shall be moulded with a frog of 100 X 40mm and 10mm to 20mm deep on one of its flat
sides.
d.
They shall give a clear metallic ringing sound when struck by a mallet and shall not break when
dropped on the ground on their flat face in a saturated condition from a height of 600 mm.
e.
They shall show a fine-grained, uniform, homogeneous and dense texture on fracture and shall be
free from lumps of lime, lamination, cracks, and air holes, soluble salts causing efflorescence or
any other defect which may impair their strength, durability, appearance and usefulness for the
purpose intended. They shall not have any part under-burnt.
f.
The size of the conventional bricks shall be 225 X 110 X 75 mm. Only bricks of one standard size
shall be used in one work unless specially permitted by the Client / Consultant. The following
tolerances are permitted in the standard conventional size adopted on the particular work.
Length plus or minus 3.0 mm
Breath plus or minus 1.5 mm
Depth plus or minus 1.5 mm
The size of the modular bricks shall be 190X90X90mm or 190X40mm.
g.
The crushing strength of the brick to be used in all types of works shall not be less than 50
kg/sq.cm. unless otherwise specified when tested according to IS:3495(Part-1).
h.
After immersion in cold water for 24 hours, absorption by weight shall not exceed 15 percent of
the dry weight of the brick when tested according to IS:3495(part-2).
i.
Efflorescence in bricks shall be within limits prescribed in ( Not more than 10% of the exposed
area of the brick shall be covered with a thin deposit of salts) IS:3495 (part-3).
85
First Class Bricks for Exposed Brick work :
First class bricks are those, which strictly conform to the standard size of modular bricks and such
that ten layers of brick laid in mortar shall form masonry of 1 m height. These bricks shall be
manufactured from good quality plastic earth, which is free from saline deposits. They shall have
straight edges and even surfaces. When immersed in water for an hour they shall not absorb water
more than 1/6th of their weight. On drying they shall not show any sign of efflorescence.
13.1.3 Calcium Silicate Bricks :
These bricks shall be machine moulded and made form good quality and clean siliceous sand,
lime and flash (maximum content upto 30% in raw material composition). They shall have
smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in size, colour and shape. The
size of bricks shall be 228 X 110 X 73mm or as approved by the Architect / Consultant. The
compressive strength of bricks shall be minimum 150 kg / m2 and the bricks shall have very high
strength to weight ratio. The bricks shall have very good resistant capacity to atmospheric
conditions, optimum building properties in relation to heat insulation, sound insulation,
absorption of water and fire protection. Calcium silicate products shall conform to the appropriate
IS Standards and there shall be no change in civil application techniques while using it in the
place of traditional clay bricks.
13.1.4 Glass Brick Works :
It shall be from imperial or equivalent as approved by Architect / Consultant. It shall be free any
defects like cracks, air bubbles, uneven surface, breaks etc.. During handling and laying its edges
shall not be easily damaged. All edges and corners of all faces shall be sharp and well shaped. It
shall be of size and colour as specified in the B.O.O. of approved by Architect / Consultant. The
glass bricks shall be uniform size with a tolerance of + 2 mm. sports of colour other than that of
bricks shall not be allowed. The weight of each brick shall be about 2.75 kg. The transmission of
direct light through brick shall not be less than 40%. The glass bricks shall have good thermal
insulation. It shall be sound proof and vibration absorber having adequate compressive strength.
If bricks with groove or projections are used, the groove or projections shall be uniform and
regular in size and shape.
13.1.5 Storage of Bricks :
a.
Brick shall not be dumped at site. They shall be stacked in regular tiers of height not exceeding
1.5m.
b.
Bricks of different types and classifications shall be stacked separately. Generally, stacking of
bricks shall conform to IS:4082.
13.1.6 Handling :
Bricks shall be unloaded by hand and carefully stacked. These shall not be thrown to the ground
to avoid any damage.
13.1.7 Sampling and Inspection :
Representative samples shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved samples shall be
retained by the Client / consultant for comparison and future reference.
86
All bricks shall be inspected at site and shall be subjected to the approval of the Consultant who
may reject such consignments as are considered by him to be interior to the quality specified.
The Contractor shall provide all labour and plant required for the inspection and conduct of such
tests as shall be required by the Consultant without additional charges.
Efflorescence test shall be carried out for a sample of 20 bricks from a stock of 20,000 bricks.
Water absorption test shall be done for 32 bricks out of a stock of 35,000 bricks. Compressive
strength test shall be done on 50 bricks from a stock of 1,00,000 bricks.
13.1.8 Storage :
Same as that of ‘Coarse aggregate’.
14.0.0 SAND
14.1.0 SAND FOR MASONRY MORTAR :
14.1.1 General requirements :
A).
All the requirements, except particle size grading stated in the section ‘Fine aggregates’ shall
apply to this sand also. The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed
gravel sand or a combination of any of these.
B).
The particle size grading of sand in mortar for unreinforced masonry work shall be within limits
specified below, as per IS:2116.
C).
I.S Sieve Designation IS:460 (part1)
Percentage by weight Passing I.S.
Sieve
4.75mm
100
2.36mm
90-100
1.18mm
70-100
600 micron
40-100
300 micron
5-70
150 micron
0-15
Clay, fine slit & fine dust in natural sand, crushed gravel or stone sand shall not be exceed 5% by
mass when determined in accordance with IS:2386 (Part-2).
14.1.2 Sampling and Testing :
87
A)
The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS:2430
Any test which the Client/ Consultant finds it necessary to be done on sand shall be carried out in
accordance with relevant parts of IS:2386. If further conformation as to the satisfactory nature of
the material is required, compressive strength test on cement mortar cube (1:6) shall be carried
out in accordance with IS:2250 using the supplied material in place of standard sand and the
strength value so obtained shall be compared with that of another mortar cube made with a sand
of acceptable and comparable quality.
B)
Unless otherwise specified, sand for plaster shall imply natural river sand.
C)
The sand shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins, adherent coatings and
shall not contain deleterious materials such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, silt, clay, alkali, sea
shell, organic impurities, loam or any other harmful materials in such quantities so as to adversely
affect the strength or durability of plaster.
D).
Presence of clay, fine silt and fine dust in sand shall not be more than 4$ by weight as stated in
clause 3.0 or IS:1542. Organic impurities shall also be within limits as per Table 1.0 or IS: 383.
14.2.2 Grading
A)
The grading of sand for internal wall and ceiling plaster shall be within limits specified in the
following Table of IS:1542.
REQUIREMENTS OF GRADING FOR SANDS FOR INTERNAL WALL AND
CEILING PLASTER
Percentage By Weight Passing IS Sieve
IS Sieve
Designation ( As
per IS:460)
Class- A
Class- B
240
{ 98-100 for under coats
98-100 for under coats
120
{ 100 for finishing coats
100 for finishing coats
60
{ 80-95 for under coats
80-100 for under coats
30
{ 95-100 for finishing coats
95-100 for finishing coats
15
30-85
30-95
5-50
5-65
0-10
0-15
88
B)
The grading of sand for external for external plaster coat and rendering shall be within the limits
specified in Table B.
REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADING FOR SAND FOR EXTERNAL
PLASTERING AND RENDERINGS.
Percentage by Weight Passing IS Sieve
IS Sieve
Designation ( As
per IS:460)
Class - A
Class- B
480
100
100
240
90-100
90-100
120
70-100
70-100
60
40-85
40-95
30
5-50
10-65
15
0-10
0-15
Class A sand shall be used generally for plaster work but where they are not available. Class B
sand may be used after getting the approval from Client/ Consultant.
Deviation of about 5% from the specified limits in the grading for fractions passing IS Sieve 120
and 60 only may be allowed subject to agreement between the Client/ Consultant and the
supplier. Any other deviation shall be left to the discretion of the Client/ Consultant.
14.2.3 Sampling and Testing :
Same as that for masonry mortar.
14.2.4 Storage :
Same as that of ‘ Fine aggregate’.
15.0.0 MATERIALS FOR FILING
15.1.0 SAND
15.1.1 Sand used for filling shall be clean river sand hard, gritty, dry and coarse, free from earth, silt
organic matter, clay and other deleterious materials.
15.2.0 MOORUM
15.2.1 QUALITY OF MOORUM :
89
The moorum shall be naturally occuring material formed by disintegration of rock. It shall be free
vegetarian, rubbish or material of organic origin and scales deleterious to concrete and reinforced
concrete.
Pieces of hard rock which do not get crushed under the roller shall not exceed 50 mm size.
15.2.2 FILLING :
Filling shall be done in 20 cm thick layers and every layer shall be power rolled with 8/10 ton
roller so as to achieve maximum compaction and till such time that no further movement is
observed under the wheels of the roller.
After filling is completed the modified procter density shall be 92% with OMC.
Before start of work the Contractor shall supply the samples of murrum from each quarry to cover
the variations expected in the supply. The samples shall be tested for the following in a
recognised laboratory in accordance with IS:2720 for the following.
Silt and clay content.
Moisture -content and dry density relationship at modified Procter density.
Moisture Control : Water shall be always sprayed and not poured. Ponding shall never be
allowed. In wet weather the work may have to be suspended. Care shall be taken to see that
moisture is uniformly spread throughout the layer and where necessary mixing with harrows and
rakes shall be done.
Measurements : Measurements shall be of the cubic contents of the completed filing and shall be
determined by taking level of testing ground and after final layer for each type of filing. All
dimensions are for compacted thickness.
CINDER :
Cinder is well burnt furnace residue which has been fused or centered into lumps of varying sizes.
Cinder aggregates shall be well burnt furnace residue obtained from furnace using coal fuel only.
It shall be sound clean and free from clay, dirt ash or other deleterious materials.
16.0.0 STEEL AND ALUMINIUM JOONERY
16.1.0 STEEL JOINERY :
16.1.1 General requirements:
Steel windows, ventilators and fixed lights shall conform generally to the provisions prescribed in
IS:1033 and IS:1361 and also dimensionally to the details shown on the drawing. Rolled steel
sections for the fabrications of steel joinery and material to be used in the manufactured of the
sections shall conform to the requirements specified in IS:7452.18.1.2 Pressed steel door frames :
a.
Steel doorframes shall be manufactured from commercial mild steel sheet of 1.25 mm thickness,
conforming to IS:226 and 4351.
90
b.
Steel doorframes shall be made true to profile and dimensions as specified in IS:4351 or as per
drawings.
c.
Each doorframe shall be consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and, if required, angle threshold.
The whole shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where no angle
threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feel of frames in order to form a
rigid unit.
d.
Base ties shall be of pressed mild steel 1.25 mm thick adjustable to suit floor thickness of
25,30,35 or 40 mm and removable, or alternatively, thresholds of mild steel angle of section 50X
25 mm, minimum, shall be provided for external door frames.
e.
Fixing lugs shall have a head made of 25 wide X 1.6mm thick steel strip of specified length and a
spilit end tall 40 mm wide X 1 mm thick and 200 long. There shall be a minimum of three lugs to
each jamb.
f.
Hinges shall be made 2.5 mm thick mild steel with a zinc coated removable pin of 6 mm diameter
( conforming to IS:1341 ).
g.
Mortar guards shall be provided as specified and these shall be welded to the frame at the head of
the frame for double shutter doors to make provision for bolts.
h.
There shall be an adjustable lock strike plate of steel, complete with mortar guard, to make
provision for locks or latches complying with the relevant Indian Standards. Lock-strike plates
shall be of galvanized mild steel and fixed at 75cm to 90cm from finished floor level.
i.
For side-hung door there shall not be less than three buffers of rubber or other suitable material
inserted in holes in the rebate and one shall be located on the centre line of the lock-strike plate
lock-strike plate. For double-shutter doors there shall be two buffers or rubber or similar suitable
material inserted in holes in the rebate in the lock jamb only at the head and spaced 15 cm at
either side of the centre line of the door.
16.1.2 Steel windows & ventilators :
a.
Steel windows, and ventilators shall be manufactured from ordinary quality structural steel
conforming to IS:1977. in case of composite units consisting of a combination of two or more
units of windows and ventilators different units shall be coupled by using coupling sections made
from MS sheet 3.15mm thick as per IS:1038. the weight of various rolled steel sections used for
the manufacture of windows and ventilators shall be as per those specified in IS:1038 unless
otherwise specified.
b
Frames shall show no wrap or interior workmanship. All openable windows shall be designed to
open outside with glazing on the outside of the frames unless mentioned otherwise. The hinges
for side-hung shutters shall be of projecting non-friction type and for top hung plain type unless
specified. Hinge pins and washers shall be of galvanised steel or aluminium alloy of suitable
thickness. Weather bars shall be titted to fabricated coupling section wherever required.
c.
Steel ventilators with fixed louvers shall comprise of 16 gauge pressed steel guides spaced at
50mmc/c for receiving glass louvers 4mm thick. MS pressed steel louvers shall be fabricated out
of 16 gauge sheet bent to ‘Z’ shape and shall be tack welded to frames.
91
16.1.2 Sliding Doors :
a.
Unless otherwise mentioned, all the sliding doors shall be top hung, with coburn track and with
galvanised corrugated sheeting of thickness 24 gauge (0.63mm) on the outer face. At the bottom a
guide angle shall be provided with the frame of the door and a channel shall be anchored in the
floor concrete. The framing angles for the doorframe shall be as per the detailed drawings. The
doors shall be provided with an eyepiece of 16mm diameter.
b.
The siding door shall be in one leaf. The doors shall be hung from the top by supporting wheels
fitted in steel hangers Of substantial design, extending at least 400 mm down the door unless
designed with a double strap in which case they need not extend more than 300 mm. Hangers
shall be riveted to the door and if the door exceeds 1.5m in width not less than three hangers each
with a wheel shall be fitted. Supporting wheels and pins shall be of steel and wheels of low
friction type shall be used. The rail upon which the supporting wheels run shall be a flat bar of
steel at least 75 X 50 X 8 mm in section or an angle at least 65 X 65 X 8mm in section on which a
steel runner bar 16X16mm in section is fixed by rivets at 225mm centres to carry grooved
supporting wheels.
16.1.4 Rolling Shutters :
a.
Rolling shutters shall in general conform to IS:6248 and shall be fabricated out of mild steel laths
having interlocking curls at both edges with 12mm minimum depth of corrugation for resisting
manual pressure and normal wind pressure. The laths shall be fabricated out of cold rolled steel
strips. Conforming to IS:4030. Each lath section shall be continuous single piece without any
welded joint. The water shielding surface shall be kept on the side exposed to atmosphere. When
interlocked the rolling centres of the laths shall be a 75 mm centres minimum. Each alternate lath
section shall be fitted with malleable cast iron ( conforming to IS:2108) or mild steel clips
securely riveted at either end and thus preventing their lateral movement and wearing of their
edges against the guide channels. The clips shall be so designed so as to fit the contour of the lath
sections.
b.
The shutter shall be provided with bottom lock plate fabricated out of 3.15 mm thick mild steel
sheet reinforced by an angle iron stiffener of not less than 35X35X5 mm size at the bottom and
MS flat at the top. It shall be interlocked with the bottom lath so as to have a firm contact against
the sill while the shutter is in closed position. The lock plate shall be fitted with necessary sliding
bolts and pulling handles usable from both interior and exterior sides of the plate.
c.
The guide channels shall be either of rolled section or one piece pressed construction and shall be
of thickness not less than 3.15 mm. The depth and width of guides shall be such that there is
sufficient clearance between the curtain and the inner surface of guides to ensure not only free
movement of curtain but holding it firmly at the ends upto a maximum wind pressure of 200 kg/
sqm and preventing it from ratting as well. The minimum depth of channel shall be 65 mm for
widths upto 3.50 m and 75 mm for widths more than 3.50 metres. Width of guide channel shall be
25 mm for lath sections with depth of corrugation 12mm. the guide channel shall have minimum
3 numbers of MS holdfasts and the maximum spacing shall however, not exceed 750mm.
Provision of MS stopper at the maximum height shall be made not he guide channels.
d.
Bracket plates shall be of hexagonal, square or circular contour and shall have a U-shaped cast
iron or mild steel clamp welded to it at the centre. The bracket plate shall be made out of 3.15 mm
thick mild steel plate and size shall conform to the requirements in IS> the plate shall be held in
position rigidly by means of suitable foundation bolts and in the case of push and pull type
92
shutter, extra tying to the guide channel by means of a square bar not less than 20 mm size shall
be provided.
e.
The suspension shaft of the roller shall be made of heavy duty steel pipe conforming to IS:1161
and shall be of adequate diameter to have minimum deflection with suitable flange coupling. The
pipes of the shaft that are clamped to the brackets shall be fitted with rotatable cast iron pulleys to
which the curtain is attached. The pulleys and the pipe shaft shall be connected by means of pretensioned helical springs, flat or coil type conforming to grade 2 of IS:4454 hardened and
tempered.
f.
Ball bearings provided for rolling shutters shall be two-row self-aligning type with special cast
iron castings at the extreme pulleys at either end. The pulleys shall be interconnected with a cage
formed out of mild steel flats of at least 32 X 6mm and spaced at 15cm.
g.
The hood cover shall be made of 0.9 mm thick MS sheets with necessary stiffeners and
framework. The cover shall be of hexagonal, square or circular contour depending on the bracket
plate contour. This shall be supported at regular intervals to prevent sagging.
h.
Unless otherwise specified for overall area of rolling shutters upto 10 square meters, pull and
push type hand operated shutters with ball bearings shall be provided. For areas more than 10
sq.m. and upto 35 sq.m mechanical operated gear type with ball bearings shall be provided. A
pulling hook shall be provided for each of the rolling shutters. The pulling hook shall consist of
12 mm diameter rod with a hook at one end and a ring at the other end of adequate length.
g.
Power operating shutter shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50 cycle, 400 volt AC power supply and
shall be either floor or wall mounted unit. The motor shall be of sufficient capacity to move the
shutter in either direction at a speed of 0.3m/ sec. In addition to the gear motor, each standard
power unit shall include a magnetic brake, reversing starter with built-in overload protection, a
geared limit switch and one push button station located inside the building. It is desirable that the
bottom bar of motor operated doors shall be provided with a sensitive edge, electrically connected
stop the travel of the door on meeting an obstruction. Operating chains shall be tested quality,
heavily galvanised and with all ends rounded to assure smooth operation and hand protection.
Reduction gears shall be of high strength grey cast iron, machine moulded from machine cut
pattern. These shall be operable from a push button station conveniently located beside the door.
One emergency hand chain / crank operation shall also be provided for use in case of failure of
the electrical system.
16.1.5 Supply :
All doors frames, windows and ventilators shall be dispatched with the opening parts suitably
secured to preserve alignment when fixing and glazing.
Fixing lugs, couplings, fittings and hardware shall be dispatched separately.
Composite windows shall be dispatched uncoupled.
Aluminium Joinery
General requirements:
93
a.
Anodised aluminium joinery shall conform to the requirements specified in IS: 1948 and 1949
and shall be of Hindalco. Indal or equivalent reputed make with size and design as per relevant
drawings. The average thickness of anodic coat shall not be less than 20 microns (IS:7088) and
shall be matt finished.
b.
Aluminium doors, windows, ventilators shall be made of aluminium alloy conforming to IS: 733
and sections shall generally conform to IS:1948. Coupling members forming composite sections
shall be of extruded aluminium alloy section. All frames shall have corners machine-jointed to a
true right angle. For side hung shutters, hinges shall normally be of projecting type made of
aluminium alloy and riveted / machine-jointed to frame and shall have stainless steel/ aluminium
alloy pins. Irrespective of the hinges being anodised or not, the aluminium alloy pins shall be
anodised to a minimum film thickness of 25 microns and shall be sealed with oil or wax.
Handles, peg stays shall be of approved heavy-duty quality aluminium or its alloy conforming to
IS specifications.
c.
The doorframe and shutters shall be single action or double action as indicated in the drawing
with hydraulic door closer in the floor. The doors shall be provided with anodized aluminium
door handles for full width of door inside and outside. The door frame shall be provided with
approved anchors spaced not more than 900mm centres.
d.
Before erecting, frames coming into contact with concrete, masonry, plaster or dissimilar metals,
shall be coated with a thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose
butyrate, which is compatible with zinc chromate to protect the surface from wet cement during
installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed. Before handling
over, the aluminium work shall be washed with mild solution of non-alkali soap and water.
Gaskets to be used shall be made of neoprene / EDPM of approved make and shall be approved
by the Client/ Consultant before fixing in position. The sealant shall be of approved make and
shall be duly approved before application. Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators after fixing
in position shall be watertight and airtight.
LI aluminium material used shall be specially anodised for protection against corrosion in marine
environment in approved shade. The anodic coating shall conform to IS:1868 and shall be of
AC25 grade with minimum thickness of 20 microns when measured as per IS:660/2 and density
shall be at least 32MG/sqm. The anodic coating shall be double sealed or alternatively sealed with
steam and shall be of minimum thickness of 50 microns. The anodic coating shall be tested in a
laboratory by Eddy current method as per IS:6012 for thickness. Sulphuric acid shall be used as
the electrolyte for the anodic process.
Whenever specified, polyester grade machine applied power coating of minimum thickness 20
microns shall be provided and such coating shall be of approved shade.
Supply :
Same as for steel joinery.
Unloading and Stacking :
The fabricated frames shall be transported, unloaded, stacked and handled in a careful manner.
They shall be stacked on edge on level bearers and supported evenly. All precautions shall be
taken to ensure that the frames are not damaged or distorted in any manner. As decided by the
94
Client/ Consultant, the damaged or distorted frames shall be replaced and made good at the
expense of the Contractor. Generally, storage of doors and frames shall conform to IS:4082.
Sampling :
Sampling and criteria for conformity for steel/ aluminium doors, windows, ventilators and fixed
lights shall be as prescribed in the respective Indian Standards.
Hardware for joinery works
General requirements:
a.
Fittings shall be of MS, brass, aluminium or as specified. These shall be smooth and free from
sharp edges, corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be countersunk to suit the head of
specified wood screws. All hinge pins shall be of steel and their riveted heads shall be well
formed.
b.
MS fitting shall be finished bright or black enamelled or copper oxidised or painted as specified.
Brass fitting shall be finished bright (brass), oxidised or chromium plated (electroplated) an
aluminium fittings shall be finished bright or anodised or as specified. Fittings shall be approved
by the Client/ Consultant before fixing. Screws used for fittings shall be of the same metal as that
of the fittings. However, anodised cadmium/ chromium fittings. In case of renewal works, the
new fittings shall as far as possible, match with the existing ones. Screws shall be driven home
with screw driver and not hammered in.
These shall be mild steel but Hinges (medium), brass butt Hinges (light/ ordinary), brass but
Hinge (heavy), brass oxidised but V (light/ ordinary), brass oxidised but V (heavy), extruded
aluminium alloy but V or as specified. Brass and MS but Hinges shall generally conform to
IS:205 and IS:1341 respectively.
Parliament Hinges :
These shall be mild steel or cast brass or as specified and shall generally conform to IS:362.
Spring Hinges :
These shall be made of MS or brass casing with steel spring and shall conform generally to
IS:453. Hinges shall work smoothly and hold the door shutters truly vertical in closed position.
The size of spring Hinge shall be taken as length of its plate.
Plano Hinges :
These shall conform to IS:3818 and shall be made of mild steel, brass, or aluminium alloy sheets.
Mild steel Hinges shall be finished with anticorrosive treatment or plating of brass or nickel as
specified. Piano hinges shall be fixed for the full height of cupboard shutters.
Tee Hinges :
95
These shall be made of MS sheets and finished bright. They shall conform to IS:206.
19.3.0 Sliding Door Bolts :
These shall be of aluminium and conform to IS:2681. they shall be capable of smooth sliding
action. Alternative materials may be adopted on the approval of the Client/ Consultant for
specific locations.
Door latch :
These shall be mild steel, brass or as specified and shall be capable of smooth sliding action.
19.5.0 Tower Bolts :
Tower bolts may be of one of the following types :
Brass barrel tower bolt with cast brass parallel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.
Brass barrel tower bolt with brass sheet parallel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.
Anodised aluminium barrel tower bolt with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium
alloy (10 / 12mm dia shoot).
MS tower bolt with barrel.
These shall generally conform to IS:204 parts 1 & 2 steel spring and ball shall be provided
between the bolt and the barrel.
Door handles :
These shall be cast brass or MS or aluminium of specified size and of the shape and pattern as
approved by Client / Consultant. These shall generally conform to IS:208. the size of the handle
shall be determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and
window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25mm long
screws.
Mortice Lock :
Mortice lock with latch and pair of lever handles shall have steel casing and brass bolts and shall
be right or left handed as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Client / Consultant. It shall
be to the approved quality and shall confirm to IS:2209. The shape and pattern shall be approved
by the Client/ Consultant. The size of the lock shall be determined by its length. The lock for
single leaf door shall have plain face and that for double leaf door shall have a rebated face. Lever
handles with springs shall be mounted on plates and shall weigh not less than 0.5 kg per pair.
These shall be of brass, finished bright chromium plated or oxidised.
Floor door stopper :
This shall be made of cast brass or anodised aluminium and shall have a rubber cushion. The type
and pattern sill be as approved by the Client / Consultant.
Hooks and Eyes :
96
These shall be of hard drawn brass or steel and shall generally conform to IS:207.
Casement Window Fasteners :
These shall be made of cast brass, anodised aluminium or chromium plated steel. Casement
fasteners for single leaf window shutter shall be left or right handed as specified. These shall not
weigh less than 0.20 kg per fastener.
Casement Stays :
These shall be made of cast brass, anodished aluminium or chromium plated steel . the stay shall
be made from channel section and shall not weigh less than that indicated below :
200mm
…
0.24 kg each
250mm
…
0.28 kg each
300mm
…
0.33 kg each
The shape and pattern of stays shall be approved by the Client / Consultant.
These shall be made of cast brass, anodised aluminium or C.P. Steel. The shape and pattern shall
be approved by the Client / Consultant. It shall not weigh less than 0.20 kg each.
Fan/ Light Pivots :
These shall be made of cast brass or C.P. Steel and shall generally conform to IS:1837. the base
and socket plate shall be made from minimum 3.15 mm thick brass or CP steel plate and
projected pivot shall not be less than 12 mm in length, cast in single pieces with the base plate.
17.13.0 Fan/ Light Catch :
These shall be made of cast brass or CP steel and shall generally conform to IS:364. steel spring
of the catch shall be 0.90mm dia 6 coils 12mm internal diameter and 20 mm long. The pattern
and the shape of the catch shall be as approved by the client / Consultant.
17.14.0 Chain with hook for fan light :
This shall be made of hard drawn brass or cast brass or CP steel welded or twisted as specified
and shall generally conform to IS:3828. One end of the chain shall be provided with an eye and
the other end with staple. The minimum thickness of plates shall be 2.24 mm and the chain shall
be 300 mm long made from minimum 4 mm hard drawn wire.
17.15.0 Hasp and staple :
Hasp and staple (safety type ) shall be made of cast brass or CP steel or alumimium and generally
conform to IS:363. The higher pin which in all cases shall be of mild steel, shall be firm and its
riveted head well formed. The movement of the hasp shall be free, easy and square and shall not
97
have any play or shake. The hasp shall fit the staple correctly. The size shall be determined by the
length of the bigger leaf of the hasp.
17.16.0 Cupboard lock :
These shall be made of cast brass conforming to IS:729 and shall be of approved make. The lock
shall be easy in working having duplicate keys.
17.17.0 Hydraulic door closer :
These shall conform to IS:3564 and be of brand approved by the Client / Consultant for both left
and right hand openings.
Hardware and fixtures shall be as specified in the drawing or schedule of quantities. All hardware
and fixtures shall be able to withstand repeated use. Door closer shall be suitable for doors
weighting 61-80 kg. Unless otherwise stated. Each closer shall be guaranteed against
manufacturing defect for one year and any defect found within this period shall be rectified or the
closer replaced free of charge. Concealed door closers shall be either floor mounted or
transmounted, suitable for installation with metal doors. It shall conform to the performance
requirements and endurance test stated in IS:3534.
18.0.0 Glazing :
18.1.0 General requirements :
18.1.1. The glass used for glazing works shall be of the best quality transparent and free from blisters,
specks, bubbles, stones, scratches, veins, air holes and other defects so as to give a clear visibility
thorough the glass.
18.2.2. All glass shall be procured from a reputed manufacture and duly approved by Client /Consultant.
The glass supplied at site shall conform to the requirements indicated in the schedule of items and
the following Indian Standards listed below:
a.
Sheet glass of selected quality as per IS:2835.
b.
Wired and Wired-figured glass as per IS:5437.
18.2.0 Sheet glass:
General :
Sheet glass is a flat transparent glass made by blowing or drawing and it shall be, to the extent
possible, colorless as judged by the un-aided eye except when viewed edgewise showing a light
blue to green tint.
Unless otherwise specified sheet glass shall weight 7.5 kg / sqm for panes upto 600x600 mm. for
panes larger than 600x600mm and upto 800x800 mm glass weighting not less than 8.7 kg / sqm
shall be sued. For bigger panes upto 900x900 mm glass weighting not less than 11.25 kg / sqm
shall be used.
Sheet glass shall be patent flattened glass of best quality and for glazing and framing purposes
shall conform to IS:1761.
98
18.2.3 Testing :
Tests for Waviness, Warpage, lines, etc. shall be done as per Appendix – A of IS:2835 and test
for thickness shall be done as per Appendix –B of IS:2835.
Any glass, found to suffer from defects beyond allowable limits (as per Table -2, IS:2835) shall
be rejected.
18.2.3. Sampling:
Representative samples of the material shall be drawn and adjudged for conformity with this
specification as prescribed in Appendix C, IS:2835.
18.2.4. Packing and marking :
Sheet glass shall be packed as agreed to between the purchase and the supplier. The packages
shall be marked with ISI certification mark. Packages shall also be marked with name and quality
of the material, nominal thickness and cut size, name of the manufacture, as per clause 6.0 of
IS:2835.
18.3.0 Wired glass and wire-figured glass :
18.3.1 Wire glass apart from serving as a rigid glazing material helps in providing reasonable protection
against spreading of fire across.
18.3.2 The wire mesh used in the wired glass or wired figured glass should be made of steel wire 0.46 to
0.56 mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be squire or diamond with wired welded or
hexagonal with wires twisted. The wire mesh shall be embedded completely in the glass sheet at
least 1 mm from the surface and shall not be exposed at any place. Wire mesh shall not contain
more than 3 broken wires per square meter of glass.
18.3.3 Sampling and testing :
Tests for flame-proofness, thickness, etc. and sampling shall be in accordance with the methods
prescribed in IS:5437.
18.4.0 Plate glass :
Plate glass shall be polished patent flat glass of best quality. It shall have both the surface ground
flat and parallel and polished to obtain clear undisturbed vision and reflection. The plate glass
shall be of thickness mentioned in the item or as shown in detailed drawings or as specified. In
absence of any specified thickness, the thickness of plate glass to be supplied shall be 6 mm and a
tolerance of 0.2 mm shall be admissible.
18.4.0 Obscured glass :
This type of glass transmits light so that vision is partially or almost completely obscured. Glass
shall be plain rolled, figure, ribbed or fluted or frosted glass as may be specified.
18.5.0 Putty :
99
The material shall be homogenous paste and shall be free from dust, grit and other visible
impurities and shall conform to the specifications prescribed in IS:419.
Putty may be prepared by mixing one part of while lead with three parts of finely powdered chalk
or then adding boiled linseed oil to the mixture to form a stiff paste and adding varnish to the
paste at the rate of 1 liter to varnish to 18 kg of paste.
19.0.0 Tiles :
19.1.0 Terrazzo Tiles :
Terrazzo tiles shall generally conform to the standards prescribed in IS:1237 in all respects.
19.1.1 General requirements:
a.
All tiles to be used shall be heavy duty flooring tiles only, conforming to clause 3 of IS:1237.
b.
Tiles shall be manufactured from cement, natural aggregate and colouring pigment (where
require) as specified in clause 4 of IS:1237, under hydraulic pressure not less than 140 kg/ sqcm
and shall be given the first grinding with machine before delivery to site.
c.
Manufacturing process of tiles shall conform to the requirement given in clause 5 of IS:1237.
d.
Unless otherwise stated, the size of terrazzo flooring tiles shall be as follows:
Length (mm)
Breadth (mm)
Thickness (mm)
200
200
20
250
250
22
300
300
25
However, special shapes and size of tiles can be asked for by the client. In such as case, the
manufacture / supplier shall ensure to supply the tiles only in the specified shape and size.
e.
Tolerances on length or breadth of tiles shall be +/- 1mm. In addition, the difference in length of
side between the longest side and shorter side in the sample shall not exceed 1 mm. Tolerance on
thickness shall be +/- 5 mm. In addition, the difference in thickness between the thickness and the
thinnest tile in the sample shall not exceed 3mm.
f.
The minimum thickness of wearing layer for the various classes of terrazzo flooring tiles shall be
specified in Table 1 to IS:1237. unless otherwise specified the tiles shall be supplied with initial
grinding and grouting of the wearing layer.
g.
The wearing layer of the tiles shall be free from projections, depressions, cracks, holes, cavities
and other blemishes.
19.1.2 Physical requirements :
100
The tests on tiles to check physical requirements shall not be carried out earlier than 28 days from
the date of manufacture.
a.
Client can ask for any physical test to verify the acceptability of the tiles. All physical tests shall
be carried out as per Appendix A to F of IS:1237 as applicable, depending on the tests to be done.
b.
On testing, the physical requirements shall conform to the acceptability limits specified in clause
11 of IS:1237. Tiles, failing to meet acceptability criteria, shall be rejected.
19.1.3 Sampling :
Sampling and inspection shall be carried out as per clause 14 of IS:1237.
19.1.4 Marking :
All tiles shall be legibly marked on the back with the name of the manufacturer or his trade mark.
Heavy duty tiles shall be marked ‘H’
19.2.0 Ceramic Tiles :
Ceramic tiles to be used for flooring and doing shall conform to IS:13712. These shall be
procured from approved manufactures and a few approved samples shall be submitted to Client/
Consultant /architect for future reference.
19.2.1 General requirements:
The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free from deleterious, substances. The finished
tile, when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous. The tiles shall
be sound, true to shape, flat, free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their
utility.
Glazed Ceramic tiles: Glazed ceramic tiles shall be highly pressed, single fired, red body, top
glazed white or coloured, plain or with designs. The body glazed ceramic tiles should consist of
high grade clay and minerals and well pressed in hydraulic presses and glaze should be a
combination of different minerals. The top surface shall be glazed with stable glass/ semi-glass /
matt finish of uniform colour and texture. The edges and under side of the tiles shall be free from
glaze and shall have ribs or indentations so that these may adhere properly to the surface below.
Floor tiles : These tiles should have high strength, good resistance to wear and tear, low water
absorption and sufficient anti-skid properties and all shall conform to IS: 13755. Based on the
properties of the glaze and hardness, floor tiles are categorized abrasion resistant-wise as group II
TO V. According to the intensity of foot traffic the tile group shall be selected and used.
Wall tiles : These tiles shall be single fast fired having medium water absorption and high
strength characteristics. These tiles shall have high glaze and better adhesion to wall and shall
conform to IS : 13753. Wall tiles shall be glossy/ semi-glossy, matt glaze finish, white or
coloured, plain or printed special printed and premium printed.
101
Vitrified ceramic unpolished/ polished tiles : These tiles are of different shades having monolithic
body that is pressed in very high tonnage press and fired to high temperature. The tiles shall be
homogeneous and compact through out the entire body with very high strength, low porosity and
extreme surface hardness, high resistance to abrasion by chemicals and shall conform to IS:4457.
The tiles shall be with smooth surface or textured anti-skid finish surface. Polished vitrified
ceramic floor tiles shall be homogeneous heavy and though with highly reflective polished
surface but non-slippery.
19.2.2 Sampling & Testing :
Sampling shall be done as per IS:13711 and testing shall be done as per IS:13630. samples of
each type/ design/ finish/ size/ colour of tiles shall be submitted well in advance to the Architect
Consultant for approval at the Contractor’s cost. The consultant / architect shall retain approved
sample. Tiles shall be procured from a single approved source who can provide products of
consistent quality and physical properties.
19.2.3 Storage :
The tiles shall be delivered in original containers with seals unbroken. Adequate precaution shall
be taken to prevent accidental damage to tiles while unloading and these shall be stored under
cover in manner approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.2.4 Acceptance criteria :
Acceptance criteria shall be as per IS:13711.
19.3.0 Anti-skid tiles :
19.3.1 General requirements:
The tiles be free from any flaw, fissure, crack or any other manufacturing defect that may
adversely affect their utility. They shall be flat, square, true to shape and sound.
Finish shall be mat finish.
Compressive strength shall not be less than 70N/mm.
Maximum permissible water absorption shall be 2 percent.
Maximum permissible average wear shall be 2 mm. However, for an individual specimen this
value shall be 2.5 mm.
Tiles meant for dadoing purposes shall not be used for flooring.
19.3.2 Sampling and testing :
Sample as that of ‘Ceramic tiles’.
19.3.3 Acceptance criteria :
Same as that of ‘Ceramic tiles’.
102
19.4.0 Acid Resistant tiles :
19.4.1 General requirements:
The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free form deleterious, substances. The finished
tile, when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous. The tiles shall
be sound, true to shape, flat free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their
utility.
Size of ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles shall be as follows :
i.
100 X 100 (or) 98.5 X 98.5mm
ii.
150 X 150 (or) 148.5 X 148.5mm
iii.
200 X 200 (or) 198.5 X 198.5mm
Half tiles for use as full times. If manufactured, shall have dimensions that shall be such as to
make the half tiles, when jointed together, match with the dimension of a full tile.
Thickness shall be 25,20,12&10mm.
Depth of the grooves on the underside of tiles shall not exceed 3mm.
Tolerance in length, width and thickness of tiles shall be +/- 2.5 percent.
Half tiles for use as full tiles, if manufactured, shall have dimensions that shall be such as to make
the half tiles, when joined together match with the dimension of a full tile.
Tolerance in length width and thickness of the tiles shall be +/- 2.5 percent. Other requirements
shall be in accordance with Table -1 of IS:4457.
20.0.0 Paints
20.1.0 Enamel paint :
20.1.1 General requirements:
Paint and enamel shall be of approved quality Colour for enamels shall conform to IS:5. These
shall always meet the requirements (colour and space) of the Client/ Consultant / architect.
These shall be purchased from reputed manufacturers only as directed by the Client/ Consultant.
Under no circumstances the paint shall be diluted with linseed oil or any other material before
application. The method of application shall be as prescribed by the manufactures.
Paint shall not show excessive setting in freshly can and shall easily be mixed with paddle to a
smooth homogeneous state.
While brushing, the paint shall be easily brush able possess good leveling properties with no
running or sagging tendencies.
103
The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness, unevenness and other
imperfections.
20.1.2 Primer :
Primer shall be Zinc Phosphate.
20.1.3 Packing and Marking :
Packing and marking of packages of paints, enamels & primers shall be in accordance with
IS:5661.
20.1.4 Sampling :
Representative samples of the material shall be drawn as prescribed under 3 of IS : 101 whenever
directed by the Client/ Consultant.
20.1.5 Storage :
Paints of all types shall be stored in a cool dry place, preferable in a godown specifically made fro
the purpose. In general, storage of paints shall be in accordance with IS:4082.
20.2.0 Plastic emulsion paint :
Plastic emulsion paint for interior and exterior use shall conform to IS:5411 (parts- 1& 2)
respectively.
20.2.1 General requirements:
a.
the emulsion paint and primers in general shall be of approved quality, colour, shade and brand as
directed by the Client/ Consultant.
b.
The material shall
medium consisting
ingredients as may
standard.
c.
The paint, for interior use, shall meet the requirements of IS:5411 (part-1), on testing. The paint
for exterior use shall comply with the requirements of IS:5411 (par-2).
d.
Any special requirement, if agreed to between the supplier and the Client/ Consultant, shall have
to be complied with.
consist of pigments with suitable extenders in suitable proportions, in a
of any stable synthetic polymer emulsion in water, with suitable other
be necessary to produce a material so as satisfy the requirements of this
20.2.2 Packing and Marking :
Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be packed in metal containers lacquered inside with
a suitable chemical resistant material.
Each container shall be marked in a manner as specified in clause 4 of IS:5411 (part – 1).
20.2.3 Sampling :
104
Representative samples of the material shall be drawn as prescribed under 3 of IS:101 whenever
directed by the Client/ Consultant.
20.2.4 Testing :
a.
Tests shall be conducted according to the methods prescribed in IS:101. Appendices A to E of
IS:5411 (part-1) and Appendices A to E of IS:5411 (part-2), as applicable.
b.
Unless otherwise specified, pure chemicals and distilled water (conforming to IS: 1070) shall be
employed in tests.
20.2.5 Storage :
Paints shall be delivered in sealed containers. They shall be stored in accordance with the
provisions of IS:4082.
20.3.0 Cement paint :
20.3.1 General requirements:
Cement paint shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS:5410
The material shall be in powder form, free from lumps.
When mixed with required volume of water, it shall be suitable for use on porous surface of
masonry, concrete, stucco, common brick and rough plaster work, except gypsum plaster.
20.3.2 Scaffolding :
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no part
of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white or colour washed.
A property secured and well tied suspended platform may also be used for whitewashing and
colour washing.
Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied at top and bottom to prevent
scratches to the walls and floors.
For whitewashing of ceilings, proper stage scaffolding may be erected, where necessary.
20.4.0 White wash, colour wash :
White washing and colour washing on concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces in building shall
conform to IS:6278.
20.4.1 Materials :
Following materials are used to prepare whitewash and colour wash.
105
Lime used for whitewashing shall be freshly burnt fat line ( also classified as class ‘C’ lime)
conforming to IS:712. It shall be white in colour.
Water shall be clear, free from all organic and suspended impurities. Water shall meet the
requirements mentioned in the clause 4.3 of IS:456. portable water is generally considered
suitable for this purpose.
Colour wash shall be done with mineral colours not affected by lime added to white wash. No
colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash to the required shade or tint has been
approved by the architect/ consultant. The colour shall be of even shade over the whole surface. It
is blotchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be redone by the Contractor at his own cost.
Gum or glue.
Sodium chloride to be used shall conform to IS:253 or grade II of IS:797.
Ultramarine blue or Indigo shall conform to IS:55.
Pigments :
i.
low and red ochre- The ochres shall conform to IS:44. The solid lumps shall be crushed to
powder.
ii. Blue vitriol – Fresh crystals of hydrous copper sulphate (blue vitriol ) shall conform to IS:261 and
shall be grounded to fine powder.
20.4.2 Scaffolding : Same as for ‘Cement part ’
20.5.0 Distemper :
20.5.1 Dry distemper :
The powdered / dry distemper shall be approved colour and of approved brand and shall conform
to the requirements prescribed in IS:427 & 428. The shade shall be got approved from the
architect / consultant before application. The dry distemper of approved brand and colour shall be
stirred slowly in clean water using 6 deciliters (0.6 litres) of water per kg of distemper or as
specified by the manufacture. Warm water shall be used. It shall be allowed to stand for at least
30 minutes ( or if practicable over night ) before use. The mixture shall be well stirred before and
during use to maintain an even consistency. Distemper shall not be mixed in larger quantity than
is actually required for one day’s work.
20.5.2 Oil bound distemper :
The specifications and condition for this shall be the same as that applicable for dry distemper,
except that all bound distemper of approved make, shade and colour shall be used after applying
priming coat of purifying liquid or other primer as may be recommended by the manufacturer /
supplier. It shall conform to IS:428.
20.5.3 Scaffolding :
106
Same as for ‘Cement Paint’.
206.0 Heritage wall finish :
It shall be from Bakelite Hylam Ltd. Or equivalent as approved by the architect/ consultant. It
shall conform to international Standards.
It shall be two-component finish. It shall be easily applicable using trowels and no special tools
and training shall be required for application. The single coat application thickness shall be 1.52
mm of colour and texture as approved by the architect. It shall be weather and fade resistant water
and damp resistant, durable, and highly washable. It shall be acid and alkali resistant, high
abration resistant, non-toxic and shall be capable to lake any shade. It can be applied on wide
variety of surface like cement mortar, plywood, plaster board, AC sheet, gypsum plaster or any
other absorbent material to get homogenous layer.
It shall be incombustible and flexible. It shall be good fire resistant, anti-fungal, good impact
resistant having adhesion strength more than 8 kg/ sqcm. There shall not be any development of
hairline cracks and no peeling off shall occur after the maximum drying lime of 4 hours and
during period of 2 days.
20.7.0 Acrylic emulsion paint :
It shall be water based acrylic Co-polymer emulsion with rutile titanium-dia-oxide and other
selected pigment and fungicide. It shall exhibit excellent adhension to plaster and cement surface
and shall resist deterioration by alkalis salts. The paint film shall allow the moisture in the wall to
escape without any deterioration in colour or without showing flaking, blistering or peeling.
21.1.0 False ceiling :
21.1.0 General requirements:
21.1.1 The ceiling boards shall conform to the requirements specified in the schedule of items or in the
drawings. They shall be strong and with uniform texture without cracks, holes or any other
defects.
21.1.2 Galvanised steel grid system :
Main runner-Hot dipped galvanised steel, T shaped of 24 X 38mm size and thickness 0.33 mm
cross runner- Hot dipped galvanised steel, T shaped of 24 X 30mm size, thickness 0.25 mm. 1200
mm long and 24X25 mm size. Thickness 0.25mm, 600mm long. Perimeter section shall be same
material as runners. Sections shall be 22X22mm size with thickness of 0.45 mm. Exposed areas
of all members shall be powder coated to a thickness of 25 micron.
Gypsum Board Tiles with Seamless Joins :
The above shall be of the best quality from India Gypsum or equivalent as approve by the
architect. It shall be formed by enclosing and bonding together a core of set gypsum plaster by
two sheets of heavy paper. It shall offer high standards of safety, thermal efficiency and
aesthetics. It shall be light weight, offer good fire resistance. It shall be a non-resonant material,
rendering sound insulation. It shall be strong, durable and dimensionally stable. It shall offer a
107
smooth surface which can be painted, titled or wall-papered. It shall block this passage of heat
and shall retard the spread of fire. It shall reduce upto 60 db of sound.
Gypsum boards shall conform to IS:2095-1982 & IS:2542-1981.
It shall be resistant to delamination due to moisture and cyclic changes in weather and humidity.
The density shall be 288 kg/ cum and the weight shall vary from 8-12.8 kg/sqm depending on the
thickness. It shall be available in thickness of 9.5, 12.5 and 15mm.
Standard size are 610x610mm, 1220x610mm.
Steel false ceiling :
Panels shall be cold rolled steel, galvanised as per IS:277 coil coated as per JIS 3312. panels shall
be 150 wide and 17 mm deep. They shall be roll-formed out of 0.5mm TCT coil coaled
glavanised steel. They shall be degreased, pretreated and coil coated on one side in
manufacturer’s standard shades. The rear of the panels shall be given a coat primer and a wash
coat, while the finished side will be given a coal of primer and a finish colour coat in polyester
paint for a minimum dry film thickness of 20 microns. Panels shall be factory cut to lengths upto
5m to suit site dimensions.
Panel stringers shall be 34.5 mm wide and 48 mm deep with cutouts to hold panels in a module of
150mm. they shall be roll-framed out of 0.6mm thick galvanised steel strip cut to a standard
length of 5m. stringers shall be stove enameled black.
Stringers shall be suspended form the roof/ truss by galvanised steel wire rod hangers and
suspension clips. Hangers shall be fixed to roof by J hooks and nylon inserts or using 18 g
annealed GI wire.
Edge profiles shall be L shaped, roll formed out of 0.65mm aluminium strip/ 0.6 mm galvanised
steel strip with powder coating in standard colours.
Testing :
Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of relevant standards and as directed
by the Client/ Consultant.
Miscellaneous materials :
Performed filler board for joints :
Performed filler board shall be ‘SHALITED” or equivalent conforming to IS:1838 and should
consist of a fibre board impregnated with bituminous materials to render it durable and
waterproof. It should be compressible and possess a high degree of resilience. It shall withstand a
dampen minor vibrations.
The filler should permit free movement of the concrete members in expansion and contraction
and should provide waterproof seal and resist entry of any foreign material. The filler should be
resilient and non-extrudible.
Polysulphide sealant :
108
Polysulphide sealants shall be of approved make and shall comply with all the requirements
prescribed in IS:12118.
It shall be a two-component polysulphide rubber joint sealant based on low molecular weight
polymer. It should not contain cholrides or other corrosive substances.
The modulus of elasticity of the sealant shall not be less than 0.16 Mpa+/-10% at 100%
ekibgatuib, tge sgire hardness shall be 22+/-3@25oC to 80 C. The permanent dynamic movement
capability shall be +/-25%. The tensile strength shall not be less than 0.4 Mpa.
It shall posses properties like 550% elongation at break, non-toxicity when fully cured, no stating,
shrinkage less than 1%. The trafficable strength shall be achieved within 24 hrs and full at 7 days
(at 25 c & 250% RH).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WORKMANSHIP
EARTHWORK :
SETTING OUT AND MAKING PROFILE :
Masonry pillars will be erected at suitable points. These bench mark shall be connected to
standard bench mark. In addition to these pillar center line pillars shall also be erected by the
Contractor and footing positions shall be marked with the help of these pillars. The necessary
profile shall be set out. The level shall be taken at an interval as directed by IEC.
The levels shall be recorded in field books and plotted on plan before starting the excavation.
EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION :
The cutting shall be done to minimum depths as per drawings and as advised by EIC. Any excess
excavation carried out by the Contractor without proper permission from EIC shall not be paid
and the excess depth shall made good by the Contractor by PCC 1:4:8 at Contractor’s own cost.
BACKFILLING :
In case water is encountered during the excavation for foundation, or flooring of pits due to any
other reasons the contractor shall arrange for dewatering the same at his own cost.
EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK:
CUTTING
Where hard rock is met, generally excavation by chiseling and wedging shall be carried out.
Excavation by blasting shall be done only after obtaining written approval from Engineer-inCharge /Architects. In case of excavation by blasting all the provisions of explosive rules 1940
(Corrected upto date) shall be complied with storing, transportation and handling of explosive
materials. The blasting operation shall be carried out under the supervision of a responsible
authorised agent of the Contractor. Blasting work shall not be carried out within 200 meters of an
existing structure unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge /Architects.
MEASUREMENT
Where ordinary rock and hard rock is mixed, the measurement of the excavation shall be carried
out by stacking both the types of excavated rock separately. The net quantity of rock shall be
109
arrived at by applying reduction of 50% for looseness in stock. If the sum of net quantity of two
kinds of rock exceeds the total quantity of excavated material, then the quantity of each type rock
shall be in the ratio of net quantities in stack measurement of the two types of rocks.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOORRUM FILLING
QUALITY OF MOORRUM:
The moorrum shall be naturally occuring material formed by disintegration of rock. It shall be
free from vegetarian, rubbish or material of organic origin and scales deleterious to concrete and
reinforced concrete.
Pieces of hard rock which do not get crushed under the roller shall not exceed 50mm size.
FILLING:
Filling shall be done in 20cm thick layers and every layer shall be power rolled with 8 /10 ton so
as to achieve maximum compaction and till such time that no further movement is observed
under the wheels of the roller.
After filling is completed the modified product density shall be 92% with OMC.
Before start of work Contractor shall supply the samples of murrum from each quarry to cover the
variations expected in the supply. The samples shall be tested for the following in a recognised
laboratory in with IS:2720 for the following.
Silt and clay content.
Moisture - content and dry density relationship at modified Proctor density.
Moisture control: Water shall be always sprayed and not poured. Ponding shall never be allowed.
In wet weather the work may have to be suspended. Care shall be taken to see that moisture is
uniformly spread throughout the layer and where necessary mixing with harrows and rakes shall
be done.
Measurements:
Measurements shall be of the cubic contents of the completed filling and shall be determined by
taking level of testing ground after final layer for each type of filling. All dimensions are for
compacted thickness.
BRICK MASONRY
SOAKING OF BRICKS:
Bricks required for masonry shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour.
110
LAYING:
Bricks shall be laid in English bond unless otherwies specified. Half or cut bricks shall not be
used except where necessary to complete the bond. Closure in such cases shall be cut to the
required size and used near the end of the wall.
The walls shall be taken up truly plump. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical
joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in alternate course shall come directly one over the
other. The thickness of the brick courses shall be kept uniform.
All hold fasts of doors, windows, etc. which are required to be built in walls shall be embedded in
cement mortar or in cement concrete as specified in their correct position as the work proceeds.
JOINTS:
Bricks shall so laid that all joints are full of mortar. The thickness of joints shall not exceed one c.
for brickwork of any class designation. All face joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of
10mm by a raking tool during the progress of work where the mortar is still green so as to provide
proper key for the plaster or pointing to be done. Where plastering or pointing is not required to
be done the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying.
The face of brickwork shall be cleaned on the same day on which brickwork is laid.
CURING:
Brickwork shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when mortar is green. Masonry work
shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days by spraying water.
ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT:SCOPE
The scope of job is to form a chemically soil barrier to prevent growth of nests or colonies of the
sub terrianian termites.
MATERIAL :
The following chemical (as specified) in water emulsion shall be used:
Chemicals
Concentration (by weight)
Chloropyrifos
1.0%
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CHEMICAL TREATMENT:
Hand operated pressure pumps shall be used for uniform spraying and proper check shall be
maintained to ensure that specified quantity of chemical is used for the required area.
TIME OF APPLICATION
111
Anti-termite treatment shall start in foundation trenches and pits before laying the leveling course
of PCC. The PCC shall be done only after the chemical emulsion has been observed by the soil
and surface is quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or the soil is wet.
The treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed and if by chance, they are
disturbed, the same shall be made good before laying the PCC.
PROCEDURE:
Treatment of Column Pits, Wall Trenches and Basement Excavation:The bottom surface and sides (upto 300mm) shall be treated with chemical at the rate of 5 litres
/sq.m.
The portion of the column foundations and the retaining walls coming in contact with the backfill,
the structure shall be treated at the rate of 15 litres / sq.M of the vertical surface. If water is used
for ramming the earth fill then treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is
completed by rodding the earth at 150mm c/c close to the structure surface and spraying the
required quantity of chemical. For RCC framed structures using 1:2:4 or richer concrete the
treatment shall start from the depth of 500 mm below ground level and there is no need to start
from the bottom of excavation for columns and plinth beams. The earth from 500mm below the
ground level and above shall be treated as described in previous paragraph. However for RCC
frame structure, there shall be no chemical treatment for column foundations.
Treatment of top Surface of plinth filling:The top surface of filled earth within plinth walls shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the
rate of 5 liters / sq.M before the subgrade of floor is laid. Holes upto 50-70mm deep at 150mm
centers shall be made to facilitate saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.
Treatment of junction of Wall and Floor :To achieve continuity of vertical chemical barrier on inner surfaces, small channels of 30x30mm
shall be made at all the junctions before laying the subgrade and rod holes shall be made upto
ground level at 150mm centres and chemical emulsion shall be poured at 15 litres / sq.m of the
vertical surface.
Treatment of soil along external perimeter of Buildings:After the building is complete, rod holes shall be made along external perimeter at 150 mm
centers and 300mm deep and these holes shall be filled with chemical emulsion at 5 liters
/running meter of perimeter.
RECORD OF CHEMICAL UESD :
A detail record of quantity of chemical used for each operation shall be kept at site duly approved
by Engineer-in-Charge /Architects.
GUARNTEE
112
The Contractor shall give a guarantee of 10 years for effective anti-termite treatment barrier.
MEASUREMENT :
The measurement shall be made in square metres on the basis of the plinth area of the building at
plinth level only for all operations described above. Nothing extra shall be measured.
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE :
SCOPE :
This specification covers the general requirements for concrete to be used on jobs using on-site
production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, handling, storage of
ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing and testing of concrete and also requirements. This
also covers the transportation of concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit and the
placing, curing, protecting, repairing and finishing of concrete.
APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS :
The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of these specifications. All
standards, tentative specifications, specifications, codes of practice referred to herein shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.
In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein, this specification
shall govern.
APPLICABLES IS SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES OF PRACTICE :
IS: 269 :-
Specification for ordinary, rapid hardening and low heat portland cement.
IS:8112:-
Specification
IS:1489:-
Specification for portland – pozzolona cement.
IS:383:-
Specification for coarse and find aggregate from natural source for concrete.
IS:2386:-
Method of test for aggregates for concrete. ( part I to VIII)
IS:516:-
Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS:1199:-
Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS:3025:-
Method of sampling and test (physical and chemical ) water used in industry.
IS:432:-
Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel (parts I& II) bars and hard
drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.
IS:1139:-
Specification for hot rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel deformed bars for
concrete reinforcement.
IS:1566:-
Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric (part II) for concrete
reinforcement.
for high strength ordinary, portland cement.
113
IS:1786:-
Specification for cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement.
IS:2645:-
Specification for integral cement waterproofing compound.
IS:456:-
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS:3370:-
Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids (parts 1 to 1V).
IS:2502:-
Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement.
IS:2571:-
Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring.
IS:3596:-
Safety code for scaffolds and ladders. (part- I& II)
IS:1200:-
Method of measurement of building works.
In the event that state, city or other Government bodies have requirements, more stringent than
those set forth in this specification, such reinforcements shall be considered part of this
Specification and shall supersede this specification where applicable.
The quality of materials, method and control of manufacturing and transportation of all concrete
works irrespective of the mix. Whether reinforced or otherwise, shall conform to the applicable
portion of this specification.
Engineer shall have the right to inspect the source/s of material/s, the layout of operations of
procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment and quality
control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and approval of Engineer-in-Charge shall be
obtained prior to starling of concrete work.
Concrete shall be mixed by mechanical mixer only and no hand mixing shall be allowed for RCC
works.
GENERAL :
The quality of materials and method and control of manufacture and transportation of all concrete
work irrespective of mix, whether reinforced or otherwise, shall conform to the applicable
portions of this specification.
Engineer shall have the right to inspect the source/s of materials/s, the layout and operation of
procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment, and the
quality control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and Engineer’s approval obtained,
prior to starting of concrete work.
MATERIALS FOR STANDARD CONCRETE :
The ingredients to be used in the manufacture of standard concrete shall consist solely of a
standard type portland cement, clean sand, natural coarse aggregate, clean water and admixture, if
specifically called for on drawings or specifications.
CEMENT
114
The use of bulk cement will be permitted only with the approval of Engineer. Changing of brands
or type of cement within the same structural will not be permitted.
Contractor will have to make his own arrangement for the storage of adequate quantity of cement.
If supplies are arranged by owner, cement will be issued in quantities to cover work requirements
of one month or less. As deemed fit by the engineer and it will be the responsibility of Contractor
to ensure adequate and proper storage. Cement bags shall be stored in a dry enclosed shed
(storage under tarpaulin will not be permitted), well away from the outer walls and insulated from
the floor to avoid contact with moisture from ground and so arranged as to provide ready access.
Damaged or reclaimed or party set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be removed
from the site. Not more than 12 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The storage arrangement shall
be approved by engineer. Consignment of cement shall be stored as received and shall be
consumed in the order of their receipt at site.
Cement held in storage for a period of Ninety (90) days or longer shall be tested. Should at any
time Engineer have reasons to consider that any cement is defective, then irrespective of its
origin, date of manufacture and/ or manufacturer’s test certificate, such cement shall be tested
immediately at Contractor’s cost at a national Test such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be
used in any work. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim of any nature on this account.
CONSISTENCY:
The consistency of the Concrete shall be such that it flows sluggish into the forms and around the
reinforcement without any segregation coarse aggregate from mortar. The slump tests are
mandatory and shall be carried out at regular intervals so that the consistency concrete can be
monitored.
PLACING OF CONCRETE:
Concreting shall commence only after inspection and written approval by EIC. Shuttering shall be
clean and free from deposits of foreign materials and proper de-shuttering agent shall be applied
to the surface.
Proper arrangements shall be provided for conveying the concrete the place of deposition without
disturbing the reinforcement.
COMPACTION:
Concrete shall be compacted immediately after placing by means of mechanical vibrators.
All RCC works shall be cured for a minimum period of 14 days or more as advised by EIC.
INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS :
Immediately on removal of forms, the RCC works shall be examined by the Engineer-in-Charge
/Architects before any defects are made good.
The work that has sagged or contains honey combing to an extent detrimental to the structural
safety or architectural concept shall be rejected.
115
Surface defects on a minor nature may be accepted and the same shall be rectified as follows:
a.
Bulges due to movement of forms, ridges at forms, ridges at form joints shall be carefully chipped
and then rubbed with a grinding stone.
b.
Honeycombed and other defective areas must be chipped out, the edges being out as straight as
possible and perpendicular to the surface. Shallow patches are first treated with a coat of thin
grout (1 cement :1 sand) and then filled with mortar similar to that used in concrete. Large and
deep patches shall be filled up with concrete held in place by forms and shall be reinforced.
c.
Holes left by bolts shall be filled carefully with mortar. Holes extending right through the
concrete shall be filled with mortar a pressure gun.
d.
The same amount of care the material in patches should be taken as with the whole structure.
POST TREATMENT OF SURFACE :
The surface which has to receive plaster or where it has to be joined with brick masonry walls
shall be properly roughened immediately after the shuttering is removed.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA OF CONCRETE WORK :
Minimum of six samples cubes shall be taken for all concreting work (periodicity as specified in
9.6 of section III) and three cubes shall be tested after 7 days curing and balance after 28 days
curing.
7
DAYS TEST:
The average strength of the three specimens shall be accepted as the compressive strength of the
concrete provided that the difference between maximum and minimum strength of the three cubes
does not exceed 15% of average strength
In case the 7 days strength is not satisfactory all further work structurally interlinked with the
concrete represented by the samples shall be stopped till the remaining three cubes are tested for
23 days strength and are found satisfactory.
28
Days Test :
The tests should generally be carried out on 28th day, but in no case, should be delayed beyond 35
days. The strength of the cubes shall be as specified in table above if they are tested on the 28th
day. In case, the cubes are tested after 28 days, the minimum acceptable compressive strength
shall be increased by 1.5 kg /cm2 for each day beyond 28 day.
The acceptance criteria of 28 days test shall be as follows:
a)
if the average compressive strength of three cubes is more or equal to the comp. strength shown
in table above, the concrete shall be accepted at full rates.
b)
If the average comp. strength of the three cubes is less than specified but not less than 75% of the
specified strength, the concrete shall be accepted at reduced rates at the discretion of EIC. The
116
reduced rate shall be calculated on proportionate basis, i.e. for every percent decrease in the
specified strength the rate shall be reduced by the same percentage.
c)
If the average compressive strength of the three cubes is less than 75% of the specified strength,
etc shall either reject the defective portion or get it dismantled along with the structurally
connected work as considered necessary at the risk and cost of the Contractor . EIC may also
desire to carry out additional tests on the defective work and if on the basis of these additional
tests, EIC is satisfied about the structural adequacy of the concrete the concrete work may be
accepted at the reduced rate as specified in b)above except, for the reduced strength below 75%
for which the reduction shall be 1.5 times for every percent decrease below 75%.
Example: Average compressive strength is 70% of specified strength. The rate payable shall be
75-1 5(75-70) = 67.5% of tendered rate.
MEASUREMENT
All measurements shall be as per IS 1200
PLASTERING
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
The following surface preparation shall be made for both single and double coat plasters. The
surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is
commenced.
In case of concrete the surface shall be chipped by chiseling and wire brushing, cleaning the
surface and erecting scaffolding it required.
CEMENT PLASTER (SINGLE COAT)
APPLICATION :
Plastering shall be stared from the top and worked down towards the floor. All holes shall be
property filled in advanced of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. To ensure
even thickness and a true surface, plaster of about 15x15cm shall be first applied horizontal and
vertically, at 3 meters intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of these
gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall then be
laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel. The mortar shall be applied in a uniform
manner slightly more than the specified thickness and brought to true surface by working a
wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways movements at
a time.
All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be
and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, junctions, etc. where
117
required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding or chamfering shall be carried
out with proper templates to the sizes required.
Horizontal joints in plaster shall not occur on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to
leakages. Good quality lime neroo shall be applied to plastered surface with steel trowel to a
thickness slightly more than specified and rubbed down to give overall thickness of 12mm and
polished to a perfectly smooth and even finish working from top to bottom.
Curing shall be commenced as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently. This shall be done by
spraying water at regular intervals.
CEMENT PLASTER (TWO COAT WORK)
The plaster shall be applied in two coats as detailed below:
Apply 12mm thick coat of CM 1:4 mixed with CICO / ACCO Proof, water proofing compound
mixed as per manufacture’s specifications as 1st cost leaving the surface rough.
When the plaster has been brought to true surface with a wooden straight edge the surface shall
be left rough with 2mm deep furrows shall be made with a scratching tool form key for the
finished coat. The surface shall be kept wet till the finishing coat is applied.
Apply 2nd coat of 8mm thick of CM 1:3 and finishing the surface by rubbing with sponge till
uniform texture is obtained.
The finishing coat shall be applied after the undercoat has sufficiently set but not dried and in any
case within 48 hours of laying the first coat.
Water Proofing
All waterproofing works to be carried out in this scope of work shall be through the following
approved agencies/ any other reputed approved local agency :For Cement Based Water Proofing :
(i)
Indian water Proofing Company.
(ii)
Leak proof – Waterproofing Corporation of India.
(iii)
Nina Industries.
(iv)
Hindustan Waterproofing.
(v)
Overseas Waterproofing.
Contractor will be required to submit a guarantee in respect of performance of waterproofing for
10 years on stamp-paper. In addition to this, an amount equal to 10% of cost of waterproofing
items shall be retained as retained as retention money for 2 years from the date of completion,
which shall be returned only after successful completion of this period.
CEMENT PAINTING
118
All outside exposed surface of masonary and concrete shall be painted with cement paint of
approved make and shade.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned & wetted with water just before the painting commence.
Cement paint shall be mixed with water as per the Specification of manufacturer. Cement paint
which can be used within an hour of its mixing shall be prepared.
MARBLE MOSAIC TILE FLOORING :
SCOPE :
This covers the laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles in floors, wall, staircases,
et c.
MATERIALS :
Cement, sand, terrazo tiles shall conform to the Specification detailed in the Materials Section.
Mixing of mortar shall be done in accordance with the specification laid down under “Cement
Mortars”.
LAYING :
Subgrade concrete or the RCC slab on which tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and
mopped. The bedding of the tiles shall be either with lime mortar 1:3 ( 1 lime putty : 3 sand ) or
cement mortar 1:3 or as specified. The average thickness of mortar shall be 30mm and thickness
at any place shall not be less than 10mm.
Lime mortar bedding shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to
harden for a day before the tiles are laid.
Over this bedding, neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the rate of
4.4 kg/sq.mt over such an area that would accommodate 20 tiles.
Before laying, the tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 20 minutes and then allowed to dry for
about 10 minutes. It is necessary to have tiles damp but not wet when they are laid. Tiles shall be
fixed by gently tapping with a wooden mallet till they are properly bedded and in level with the
adjoining tile. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible not exceeding 1.5mm. Where full-size
tiles cannot be fixed, tiles shall be cut to the required size and their edges rubbed to ensure a
straight and true joint. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less
than 12mm under the plaster, skirting or dado. After the tiles have been laid, excess cement
coming out through the joints upto the surface shall be immediately wiped clean.
CURRING, POLISHING AND FINISHING :
They day after tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement with a wire brush. The
joints shall after 24 hours be filled with matching cement paste and allowed to set. The same
cement slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat with a view to protect
the surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exit on the surface.
119
The floor shall then be kept wet and protected for a minimum period of seven days before starting
the polishing. No one shall be allowed to walk on the floor during the first 24 hours immediately
after the tiles are laid.
The surface shall thereafter be grounded evenly with machine fitted coarse grade grit block.
Water shall be used profusely during grinding. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of cement
mixed with colouring pigment to match the topping of the wearing surface of the tile sand second
grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit blocks.
The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks shall be carried out after
24 hours of completion of second grinding or before handling over the floor. The entire surface
shall be finally washed with weak solution of soft soap in warm water.
For small areas or where circumstances so require, hand polishing may be permitted as in the case
of skirting, treads and risers of staircase, etc. by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Architects.
MEASUREMENT:
Length and breadth dimensions shall be measured to the correct centimetre before laying skirting,
dado or wall plaster and area calculated in square metres correct to two decimal places. No
deduction shall be made nor extra amount paid for any opening in the floor area upto 0.5 sq.mt.
No extra shall be paid for use of cut tiles not for laying the tiles at different levels in the same
room.
TILES IN SKIRTING
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
The joints of masonry shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15mm. in case of concrete and
plastered surfaces, the surface shall be roughened by hacking. All the surface receiving tiles shall
be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before the tiling is commenced.
LAYING:
12 mm thick plaster of CM 1:3 or mixed as specified shall be applied and allowed to harden. The
plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes making grooves of at least 2mm deep before the
plaster dries. The tiles shall be soaked in water. The tiles shall be buttered with a coal of grey
cement slurry and then shall stamped in position corrected to proper planes and lines with a
wooden mallet. The tiles shall be set in required pattern and butt jointed with very fine joints. Top
of skirting or dado shall be truly vertical unless specified otherwise. The skirting or dado shall
rest on the top of flooring. The projection of skirting from the finished wall surface shall not be
more than 12mm.
POINTING AND FINISHING
120
Joints shall be cleaned off grey cement grout with wire brush or travel to the depth of 2 to 3mm
and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with while cement added
with colouring pigment if required to match the colour of the tiles. The wall shall be kept wet at
least for seven days. The finished wall shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
MEASUREMENTS:
Length shall be measured correct to a cm. Height shall be measured correct to a cm in case of
dado and 5mm in case of riser and skirting. The area shall be calculated in square metres correct
to two decimal places. Length and height shall be measured along the finished face of the skirting
or dado including curves where specials such as coves, internal and external angles and beads are
used.
PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT:
MATERIAL:
The plastic emulsion paint shall be of approved brand and manufacturer and of the required
shade.
APPLICATION
The number of coats shall be as specified. The paint shall be applied with brushes or rollers. The
thinning of emulsion is to be done with water only and not turpentine. The quantity of water to be
added shall be as specified by the manufacturer. The surface finish shall be flat, velvety and
smooth.
PRECAUTIONS:
Old brushes shall not be used. Oil based Putties for filling in cracks, depressions, etc. shall not be
used. Splashes if any, shall be cleaned immediately as they will be difficult to remove afterwards.
Washing of the surface shall not be done within 3 to 4 week of application.
Other details shall be as Detailed in Oil Bound Distemper.
ELECTICAL INSTALLATION
Electrical installation shall be as per IS 732-1989 and IE rules.
Internal and external wiring in buildings shall be carried out in concealed PVC conduit of
minimum 2mm thickness. These PVC conducts shall be laid canting concrete or by making
chases in the brick wall and making good the wall after fixing of conducts at no extra cost.
Wiring for power and light/ fan circuits shall be separate. Entire wring shall be done by flexible
PVC insured copper conductors of specified (in the job schedule ) size.
Point wiring:
The following components are deemed to be included in paint wiring.
121
Metal switch Board
Control switches 5A/ 15A as specified.
PVC Channels with cover.
Copper conductors for neutral / live earthing.
Ceiling Roses
All accessories required for termination.
The above components shall meet the following specific requirements.
Switch Boxes
Body : 16 SWG CRCA sheet. Flush type
Size : sufficient to accommodate required no. of switches.
Control Switches
Fans
:
5 Amps SP Switch
Lights
:
5 Amps SP Switch
Power Plug
:
15 Amps 3 pin Plug combined SS type.
ERECTION AND EARTHING:
The conduit of each circuit or section shall be completed before conductors are drawn in. the
entire system of conduct after erection shall be tested for mechanical and electrical continuity
throughout and permanently connected to the earthing conforming to the requirements by means
of special approved type of earthing clamps efficiently fastened to conduit pipe in the
workmanlike manner for a perfect continuity between earth wire and conduit. Gas or water pipe
shall not be used as earth medium. If conduit pipes are liable to mechanical damage they shall be
adequately protected. In a conduit system the pipe must be continuous when passing through
walls or floors.
An insulated copper earthing wire of green colour having cross sectional area of 2.5 sq.mm. shall
be drawn in the conduit pipes alongwith the circuit wires for earthing of light fittings and pins of
socket outlets.
JOIN AND LOOPING PACK:
Phase or live conductors shall be looped at the switch box and natural conductor can be looped
either from the switch box or from the light fan or socket outlet.
In both systems of wiring, no bare or twist joints shall be made at intermediate points in the
through run of cables, unless the length of final sub-circuit of sub-main is more than the length of
the standard coil, as given by the manufacture of the cable.
122
Wiring Termination:
All terminations must be mechanically and electrically sound. There should be maximum surface
contact between the terminal and conductor and such contacts shall be light since loose contact
results in high resistance and over heating at the point. In case of securing a resistance conductor
at a ordinary screw termination, it is preferable to loop the conductor in a clockwise direction as
tightening the screw tends to close the loop rather than open it. At a pillar type terminal, the
single conductor shall be bent back into itself and if two or more conductors are to be terminated,
they shall be twisted together before inserting into terminals.
Identification of Wires :
The phase conductors shall be of any of the RYB colours and the neutral conductor shall be of
black colour. Further the phase conductors in one line shall be of only one colour i.e. either red
blue or yellow. Earthing conductor shall be green.
Testing and commissioning:
After completion of installation, tests be carried out and test results shall be tabulated. Following
are the tests to be carried out and test certificates shall be handed over to the Engineer-in-Charge
for records.
Lighting Distribution Boards:
a)
Insulation test between phase, and earth with 500 V meggar.
b)
Operational Test
Safety Earthing:
a)
All earthing circuits shall be checked for continuity. The earth resistance of all
identifiable electrical equipment shall be measured and recorded.
TESTING OF MATERIALS
The conductor shall carryout the following tests at his own expense and as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Also Engineer-in-Charge reserves their right to ask the Contractor to carry
out any further tests on any material which is being used in the project.
1.
WATER: Suitability for construction / concreting purposes as per IS 456-2000.
Periodicity: One test at the beginning of the project and once in every 3 months as per as IS
code.
1.
SAND
Tests to be conducted
123
a.
Particle size -Lab
b.
Silt content – Field
c.
Bulking of sand – Field
d.
Percentage of Deleterious material / Organic impurities – lab
Is code for material – IS -383-1970
IS code for testing – IS-2386 (Part 1)to IS-2386 9Part VIII)
Periodicity of testing
Whenever there is a source of supply or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge .
Remarks
1.
Silt content should not exceed 8%
2.
For sand pad foundation no need of particle size distribution. Only silt & bulk content to
be carried out.
Sand (for plastering)
Tests to be conducted
a)
Particle size - Lab
b)
Slit content – Field
c)
Percentage of Deleterious / Organic impurities – Lab
IS code for material –IS -1542
IS code for testing – IS -1727
Periodicity of testing
Same as above, Test shall be repeated for Minimum qty. 500 sq.m of plastering.
Remarks
1.
Silt content not to exceed 5%
2.
Sand to be sieved in sieve size 4.75 mm
3.
COARSE AGGREGATE
Tests to be conducted
a.
Percentage of Soft deleterious materials-Field (Visual)
124
b.
Particle size distribution
c.
Aggregate value:
1.
Crushing – Lab
2.
Impact – Lab
3.
Abrasion –Lab(Only for Roads)
IS code for material – IS -383-1970
IS code for testing –IS -2386 (Part 1) to IS 2386 (Part VIII)
Periodicity of Testing
Minimum 45 cum. Tests to be repeated for every 45 cum of coarse aggregate or part thereof.
Remarks
Percentage of soft deleterious materials. Usually visual inspection shall be carried
out. If Engineer-in-Charge / Architects has doubts the same may be tested in Lab.
4.
CEMENT
Tests to be conducted
a.
fineness - Lab
b.
Soundness- Lab
c.
Setting Time- Lab
d.
Compressive strength –Lab
Periodicity of Testing
Minimum qty. 20 MT, Tests to be repeated for every 50 MT or part thereof or change of
supplier.
Remarks
Cement to be tested if supplied by the Contractor. cement to be tested if stored for more than 3
months.
5.
CEMENT CONCRETE
Tests to be conducted
125
a. Slump test-Field
b. Cube strength-Lab / field
Periodicity of Testing
a. Once for minimum 5 cum.
b. Minimum 15 cum of part thereof.
Remarks
Cube strength to be taken for both 7 days as well as 28 days. Cubes of critical members (decided
by Engineer-in-Charge) shall be tested at lab.
6.
REINFORCEMENT STEEL
Tests to be conducted
a.
Free from defects –Field (Visual)
b.
Weight –Lab
c.
Size- Lab
d.
Ultimate tensile stress –Lab
e.
Yield stress- Lab
f.
Elongation percentage –Lab
g.
Bend Re-bend test-Lab
IS code for material
IS- 432 for mild steel
IS-1786 for Tor steel
IS code for testing-IS -1608
Periodicity of testing
Minimum qty. 10MT, tests shall be repeated for every 10 MT of each size (dia) or part thereof.
a.
Steel shall be tested if supplied by Contractor.
b.
Steel shall be tested if stored in open yard for more than one year.
NOTE: All the testing equipments / machines like sieve. Compression testing machine etc.
required for field tests shall be arranged by the party at site. In case of failure of machine. Testing
to be carried out by the Contractor at lab at no extra cost.
126
7.
BRICKS
Tests to be conducted
a.
Compressive Test -Lab
b.
Water absorption – Lab
c.
efflorescence – Lab
d.
Percentage of Deleterious material –Lab
e.
Dimension test – Lab
IS code for material – IS-1077-1986
IS code for testing –IS-3495(Part 1) to IS-3495(Part III)
Periodicity of Testing
Minimum 20000 bricks but tests shall be repeated for every 40000 or part thereof depending on
the volume of work.
8.0
TILES
Tests to be conducted
Tolerance in size (+/- 1mm on length & breath)
Thickness of wearing layer – Lab
Water absorption – Lab
Transverse Strength – Lab
Abrasion Strength- Lab
IS Code for testing as per standard
Periodicity of testing
sample tiles to be tested for minimum quantity of 80 Sqm.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work covered by this specification shall include supply and installation of all
electrical equipment and materials including testing and commissioning.
127
Any equipment, device and component of work not specifically mentioned in this specification
but considered essential for proper design and operation shall be included by the tenderer in this
offer.
The successful tenderer shall carryout the installation as per the arrangement and details shown in
the construction drawings, standards and instructions given by the Engineer.
Any variation or changes to be carried out ay site shall be done with the approval of the Engineer.
The scope of work shall include, but not to be limited to the supply, storing, installation, testing
and commissioning and drawing of the following:
i.
Electricity Board meeting arrangement to receive incoming supply, LT switch board as per
Specification and drawings. LT cabling between switch boards.
ii. Motor Control Centre for pumps/ compressors.
iii. Miniature Circuit Breaker Distribution Boards for lighting distribution boards and power
distribution boards, miniature breakers and earth leakage circuit breaker.
iv. 1.1 k. grade aluminium copper conductor, PVC insulated / FRLS PVC insulated and sheathed
armoured / unarmoured power / control cables and cable termination accessories like glands, lugs,
ferrules etc.
v. Luminaries and Lamps, Ceiling fans, Exhaust fans.
vi. Switch socket boxes, junction boxes and draw boxes.
vii. Switches sockets and accessories.
viii.1100 grade copper conductor, PVC insulated / FRLS PVC insulated multi stranded wires of
various colours.
ix. Wiring materials and accessories.
x. Earth electrode stations and earthing conductors.
xi. Building Electrification, Canopy lighting, External lighting, Low level garden lighting, power
connections to all facility sign boards, compressors, dispensing pumps.
xii. Street light poles and accessories.
xiii. Cable laying in trenches and back filling for underground cables.
xiv. Miscellaneous works other than the above as stipulated in Specification and BOQ.
xv. Liasoning with Electricity Board / Telephones Department to avail power supply / Telephone
connection unto the meter board / Telephone tag block. The cabling work for electrical system for
availing incoming power is given as an optional item, which may be required to be executed on
behalf of electricity board.
xvi. All other installation materials, hardware and consumables.
128
xvii. All tools, tackle, ladders etc. and the Contractor shall but all testing and measuring instruments
as required.
xviii. Storing of material at site and watch & ward of it till handing over.
The design shall include all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of operation and
maintenance personnel.
All equipment to be supplied shall be subject to inspection by the owner / consultants. Such inspection
shall however not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the contract.
The Engineer reserves the right to specify electrical materials and equipment of a particular make for the
purpose of standardisation and the tenderer shall agree to supply the materials of the make specified, if so
required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for timely delivery of cading at site, transport to the place of
installation, strong, installation, testing and commissioning of all the equipment and the materials that are
included in the scope of work.
The electrical contractor executing this work shall have a valid licence issued by the State Government
for carrying out installation work of the voltage class involved under the direct supervision of a person
holding a certificate of competence for the same voltage classes, issued of recognised by the State
Government
The tenderer shall furnish with this tender the particulars of the licence for carrying out the installation
work against this Specification.
All necessary safe holding for working at various heights shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall be responsible for compensation in case of any accident to his workmen at site. The
Contractor shall fulfill and bear all statutory charges for their workmen. The tenderer shall indemnity
owner / consultant of any such charges for workmen compensation.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary hardware and consumable required for the entire installation.
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY PARTICULARS
All equipment and installation covered under the scope of work shall be designed for electricity supply of
the following specification :
Voltage
:
415V / 240V -6%
No. of phases
:
3/1
Type of system
:
3 phase, 4 wire
Frequency
:
50Hz + 3%
Type of neutral earthing
:
Solidly earthed
Short circuit level
:
Not exceeding 35 KA at 415V
129
DRAWING
The drawings enclosed with this Specification are only for the guidance of the tenderer. The exact routing
of conduits, cables and wires and the exact location of the equipment shall be as per construction
drawings or as decided at site by the Engineer. ( Any field corrections shall be shown in five (5) copies of
each drawing and such as- built drawings shall be handed over to the owner by the contractor after
completion of the installation.
The drawings and other documents to be submitted by the tenderer shall be in the English language and
all the dimension, weights and quantities shall be in the metric units.
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the owner/ consultant, drawings of switch boards/ tailor
made equipment etc., as required in four (4) sets before commencing the manufacture and / or supply. The
equipment shall submit four sets(4) of as built certified drawings after complete fabrication of the
equipment.
LOCAL CONDITIONS
The tenderer shall visit the site, ascertain the local conditions, entry, traffic restrictions, and obstructions
if any and also site conditions. Whether the tenderer visits the site or not, he is deemed to have visited the
site and ascertained all the site conditions. The tenderer shall allow in his tender for an extras likely to be
incurred due to site conditions. No claim will be allowed on this account under any circumstances.
STANDARDS
The equipment and the installation work shall generally conform to the requirements of the Indian
Electricity Rules with its latest amendments and all relevant standards and code of practice of the Bureau
of India Standards.
SAFETY
The tenderer shall include and take adequate precautions as per the Indian Standard codes to ensure safety
for personnel and prevention of accidents at site. The tenderer shall be responsible for compensation to
their workmen due to accident, if any.
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the State Electricity Board and Electrical Inspectorate and
carryout charges as called for by the Electrical Inspector at no extra cost to the owner. He shall also obtain
the drawing approvals and final safety certificate from CEIG. Only the statutory fees payable to
Electricity authority shall be reimbursed by the owner on production of valid vouchers.
INSPECTION
All the materials to be supplied shall be subject to inspection by the employer / consultant. Such
inspection shall not however relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the contract. Samples of all
items materials, however, etc., to be used to the work shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge /
130
Consultant in advance. The brand / makes and grades of items / materials shall be as directed by the
employer / consultant.
TIME SCHEDULE
The tenderer shall be responsible for timely procurement and delivery of the items, off-loading at site,
safekeeping at site, transport to the place of installation, installation and testing of all the material that are
included in his scope of work. Work shall be progressed and completed as per schedule mutually agreed
upon.
CO-OPERATION
The Contractor shall coordinate his work with those of the other agencies at the site and shall avoid any
interference and interruption with the progress of the work. The Contractor shall be required to carryout
the installation side by side with other agencies as may be required by the other Contractor from time to
time.
QUANTITIES
The Quantities indicated in the Bill of quantities is for the guidance of the tenderer. The
Contractor shall supply the items based on the requirements as per Construction drawings only.
2.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE (415V) SWITCH GEAR /
BOARD
GENERAL
This Specification covers the Design, Manufacture, Fabrication, Testing at factory and supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of 415V Switch gear incorporating MCCBS / Fuse Switches /
Contractor / relays etc.
The switch board and the mounted equipment shall comply with the latest edition of the following Indian
Standards”
IS:4237
:
General requirement for switch gear and control gear for Voltage not
exceeding 1000 V.
IS: 4047
:
Heavy duty air break switches and fuses for voltages not exceed 1000V
IS: 3072
:
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of Switchgear.
IS: 2208
:
HRC CARTRIDGE FUSE LINKS – Up to 650 V
IS: 2705
:
Current Transformers. Part I.II.III
IS: 3156
:
Voltage transformers
IS:1248
:
Electrical indicating instruments
131
IS:375
:
Marking and arrangement for switch gear bus bars, main connections and
auxiliary wiring
IS: 5
:
Painting
IS: 8623
:
Specifications for factory built assemblies of switch gear and control gear for
voltage up to and including 1000 V AC & 1200 V DC
General requirements:
FABRICATION AND GENERAL DETAILS:
Switch gear shall be indoor, floor mounting, free standing type enclosed in sheet steel cubicles and shall
be dust, weather and vermin proof. Enclosures shall conform to IP-54 and shall be cold rolled sheet steel.
Gaskets shall be used between all adjacent units and underneath all covers to render the joints effectively
dost-proof. Steel sheets shall not be less 2.00 mm (14S.W.G.) in thickness. Switch gear should be of
single for type design.
Switch gear shall be extensible at both ends by the addition of vertical sections. Ends of the bus bars shall
be suitable drilled for this purpose.
The switch board shall be totally enclosed, dust, weather and vermin proof. If necessary, openings for
natural ventilation shall be provided. Gaskets of durable materials shall be provided for doors and other
openings. Switch Boards specified for outdoor installation shall be housed in outdoor type kiosks to make
it weatherproof. The switchboards shall be suitable for the ambient and site conditions specified. Suitable
hooks shall be provided for lifting the boards. These hooks when removed shall not leave any openings in
the boards.
Access from the back shall be limited to bus bars and cables only for 415 V main switch board and DG
panels. For all other panels, all equipment shall be mounted on the front side and shall be accessible from
the from through hinged doors. Switches, ammeters, voltmeters and lamps etc. shall preferably be
mounted on fixed portions.
Individual switch fuse units, MCCMs bus bar and cable entrance alleys shall be housed in separate
enclosed compartments separated from each other by metallic or any other fire resistant insulating
material barriers.
Barriers and automatic safety shutters shall be provided such that bus bars and other live parts are
inaccessible even with breakers completely drawn out. Opening of bus bar chambers shall be possible
with special tools only.
PAINTING
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and decreased to remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt.
Fabricated structures shall be picked and then cleaned to remove any trace of acid. The under surface
shall be prepared by applying a coat of phosphate paint and coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The
under surface shall be made free from all imperfections before undertaking the finishing cost.
After preparation of the under-surface, the switch board shall be painted by powder coating method of
final paint. Colour shade of final paint shall be approved by the purchaser before final painting is started.
The finished panels shall be dried in stoving ovens in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish shall be free
132
from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels, runoff paint etc. The vendor shall furnish painting
procedure details alongwith the bids.
All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or suitably treated to prevent rust corrosion. If these
parts are moving elements then they shall be greased. Suitable lifting lugs shall be provided for
switchboard. These lifting lugs shall not leave any opening when removed.
SWITCH BOARD COMPONENTS:
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
Current and voltage transformers shall be cast resin insulated type, primary and secondary terminals shall
be marked indelibly.
Current transformers shall generally conform to BIS : 2705. they shall be mounted on the stationary part.
The CT ratio and ratings shall be as indicated on the single line diagrams. For general guidance, the
vendor shall note that the protective current transformers shall have an accuracy class ‘5P’ and an
accuracy limit factor greater than ‘10’. Low reactance CTs shall be used for protection.
Current transformers for instruments shall have an accuracy class 1.0 and accuracy limit factor less than
5.0. The current transformers shall be capable of withstanding the peak momentary short circuit current
for 1.0 second. The neutral side of the current transformers shall normally be earthed through a link.
Wherever provided, the voltage transformers shall generally conform to BIS 3156. The voltage
transformers shall be provided with primary fuses. Preferably miniature circuit breakers with auxiliary
contacts shall be provided on the secondary side.
The voltage transformers shall have an accuracy class 3.0 from 50% to 110% of normal voltage and class
1.0 from 80% to 120% of normal voltage with burdens varying between 25% to 100% of the rated value
at 0.8 PF lagging.
The primary of the voltage transformers shall be rated for 415 volts and the secondary for 110 volts.
Unless otherwise stated, 2 single phase V- connected VTs shall be used.
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS:
AMMETERS
Ammeters shall be moving iron or moving coil type. The moving part assembly shall be with jewel
bearing. The jewel bearing shall be mounted on a spring to prevent damage to pivot due to vibrations and
shocks. The ammeters shall be manufactured and calibrated as per the latest edition of IS:1248. The
ammeters shall be instrument transformer operated and shall be suitable for 5A secondary of instrument
transformer. The scales shall be calibrated to indicate primary current unless otherwise specified. The
ammeters shall be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss
of accuracy.
VOLTMETERS
Voltmeters shall be of moving iron or moving coil type. The range for 415V, 3 phase voltmeters shall be
0 to 500V, Suitable selector switch shall be provided for each voltmeter to read voltage between any two
lines of the system. The voltmeter shall be provided with protection fuse of suitable capacity.
133
SWITCH AND FUSE UNITS:
The load break switches shall be heavy duty air break type and shall have quick make/ break manual
operating mechanism. The operating handle shall be mounted in the door of the compartment having the
isolator. It shall be possible to padlock the switches in the ON & OFF position. Door interlock shall be
provided so that it should not be possible to open the door with the switch in the ‘closed’ position.
Normal it shall not be possible to close the switches with the door open but for testing purposes it shall be
possible to defeat this interlock. Switches shall be able to carry full load current continuously without
overheating. Barriers shall be provided to prevent inter-phase arcing. The live terminals shall be shrouded
to avoid accidental contact. Motor feeder switches shall be adequately rated for motor duty.
Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link types. Diazed fuses will not be acceptable.
The fuses shall be non-deteriorating type and shall have an operation indicator, which will be visible
without removal of fuses from service. Fuses shall be pressure fitted type and shall have ribs on the
contact blades to ensure good line contact. It must be possible to handle fuses during off-load conditions
although full voltage may be available on the terminals. Fuse-pullers shall be provided.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
General
MCCBs shall be four-poles, triple poles or double poles, independent manual closing air break type. They
shall be totally enclosed in a moulded casing formed from an insulating material. The construction of the
casing shall be capable of withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and capable of
withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and reasonably rough use without fracture or
distortion. The moulded casing shall have protection not less than IP56.
MCCBs shall comply with and be type tested to IEC 157-1, 157-1A, 157-1B.
All MCCBs to be used for serving pump motors, fan motors, and other motor equipment shall be of motor
type and shall be capable of handling the starting currents.
All MCCBs shall be completed with dust-proof metal enclosures with all the live terminals totally
enclosed.
Operation Characteristic
MCCBs shall have a thermal-magnetic tripping mechanism giving an adjustable, stable, inverse timecurrent characteristic. The operating characteristic shall be such that:
The time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely proportional to the over currents unto a threshold
value of approximately 7 times the rated current.
There shall be no intentional time-delay on over current tripping due to short-circuit or heavy over
currents exceeding the threshold value.
The overload trip setting can be adjusted on site from 60% to 100% of breaker rated current in 10% steps.
Performance Characteristic
134
MCCBs shall be certified, in accordance with IEC Standards and shall have the following performance
characteristics:
Rated short circuit breaking capacity – not less than 25 KA for lateral submain installation or the
prospective fault current at the point of installation whichever is greater. Short circuit current
withstanding duration shall not be less than 1 second.
Shunt Trip Release
This shall operate correctly at all values of supply voltage between 70% and 120% of the nominal supply
voltage under all operating conditions of the MCCB. MCCBs incorporating shunt release shall be
provided with block terminals and shunt release lead cables.
All the MCCB should have front drive kits.
CONTROL SWITCHES:
All control switches shall be rotary, back connected type, having a cam operated control mechanism.
Preferably phosphor bronze controls shall be used on the control switches. They shall have pistol grip
handles. Number of ways, locking system etc. shall be as stated on these switches. Ammeter selector
switches shall generally have 4 positions for reading 3 phase currents and the neutral current. The
voltmeter selector switch has to also have 4 positions. Three shall be used to measure phase to phase
voltage and fourth shall be OFF position.
Remote / Trip / Off selector switch for the motor feeders shall be lockable in OFF position.
PUSH BUTTONS:
Push button colours shall be as follows:
Stop / Open / emergency
-
Red
Start / Close
-
Green
INDICATING LAMPS:
Indicating lamps shall be provided with translucent covers to diffuse light, with series resistors.
PROTECTIVE RELAYS:
Wherever used, all protective relays shall be back connected, drawn out type, suitable for flush mounting
and fitted with dust covers. Alternatively, plug-in type of relays shall also be acceptable. The relay cases
shall have provision for insulation of test plug at the front for “testing and calibration” using an external
power supply without disconnecting the permanent writing. It shall possible to short the CTs through the
test plugs.
AUXILIRY RELAYS / CONTACTORS:
Auxiliary relays / Contractors shall generally be used for interlocking and multiplying contacts. Auxiliary
contacts shall be capable of carrying the maximum estimated current. In any case, their rating must not be
135
less than 5A for 240V AC. At a power factor between 0.3 to 1.5 and 24V DC (Inductive load ). Vendors
shall note that lower voltage Contractors with a series resistance will not be acceptable for 220V DC
control supply.
TRIPPING RELAYS:
All tripping relays shall be lockout with hand reset contacts and shall be suitable to operate off the
specified DC voltage. These relays shall have coil-cut-off contacts and shall be provided with hand reset
operation indicators. Tripping relays will be acceptable in non-draw out cases. The number of contacts
shall be as shown in the schematic drawings.
INSPECTION & TESTING :
The panels shall be completely assembled, wired and tested as per IS-8623-1977 at the factory in the
presence of purchaser’s engineer or his authorised person.
The test shall include wiring continuity tests, insulation resistance tests, high voltage tests (2.5 KV AC for
1 min.) and functional tests to ensure operation of control scheme and individual equipment.
Manufacture’s test certificates in respect of all meters, switching, contactors etc. prior to inspection of
panels shall be produced to the Purchaser;’s engineer at vendor’s works.
DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUALS :
Along the offer, the contractor shall submit the following documents:
General arrangements drawings of Panels ( cudce switch board) showing the various constructional
features etc.
Single line diagram.
Technical leaflets for MCCB , fuse switches, lamps meters etc.
Foundation plan including weight.
Type test reports as per IS8623-1977 Clause 8.2.1 & 8.2.3.
After award of the contract, the manufacturer shall submit the following documents in for approval.
General arrangement drawing of Panels showing various views and foundation drawings.
Arrangement of compartments.
Single line diagram.
Complete technical particulars of all equipment.
Commissioning and maintenance instruction for all equipment.
Set of re-produceable for all above drawings.
136
Before manufacturer of the Panels, the supplier shall have to take the approval for the design and
drawings in writing. Any manufacturing done prior to approval of drawings shall be rectified in
accordance with the approved drawings by the supplier at his own cost and the equipment shall be
supplied within the stipulated period. Time schedule for drawing documents shall be enclosed separately.
PACKING AND TRANSPORTS:
The switch board shall be shipped to site packed in wooden crates. They shall be wrapped in polyethylene
sheets before being placed in crates to prevent damage to the finish. Crates shall have skid bottoms for
handling.
GUARANTEE:
The switch board shall be guaranteed for trouble free operation for a period of 12 months from the date of
commissioning or 18 months from the date of arrival at site whichever is earlier. Any defects discovered
during this period shall be rectified free of charge.
3.0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POWER & LIGHTING
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.
GENERAL
The Specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at works and supply and installation
of power and lighting distribution Boards, complete with oil accessories for efficient and trouble-free
operation.
The distribution boards shall be fabricated out of 1.6 mm thick sheet steel (RCA) and shall be totally
enclosed, dust and vermin proof, dead front, with hinged door type of bolted / welded construction
suitable for wall mounting.
Each dB shall have individual hinged/ bolted gasket doors with a suitable locking device and shall be
suitable for dusty atmospheric conditions. 3mm thick removable gland plates shall be provided in the top
and bottom of the distribution boards for cable entry.
Protective insulated cover plate shall be provided inside the panel to shroud all the live parts. Only the
operating knobs of the miniature circuit breakers / ELEC. Shall be projecting outside the cover plate. The
incoming / outing ELCB/MCB terminals shall be suitably shrouded to avoid accidental contact. Each
phase or way shall also be suitable shrouded with hylam plates.
The incoming and outgoing terminals shall be suitable for terminating cables as per the specific
requirements.
BUSBARS
The busbars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, electrolytic grade copper liberally sized
with high safety factor for the required rating (both short circuit and continuous current). The busbars
shall be sized for the full rating of the incomer. The neutral busbar shall have adequate number of
terminals for all outgoing single phase circuits. A copper earth bus of size 25x3 mm shall be provided in
each DB for earthing of the power/ lighting circuit and earthing of DB. The neutral busbar shall be seized
equal to the phase busbar.
137
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
The Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) shall be heat resistant, molded type designed, manufactured and
tested as per IS8828. the MCBs shall have inverse-time tripping characteristic against over loads and
instantaneous trip against short circuit. The MCBs shall be clip on type to the DIN Channel. The ON and
OFF positions shall be clearly marked. The MCBs shall be suitable for operating in ambient temperature
without derating. The incoming and outgoing of the MCBs shall be accessible only after opening the front
door of the DB. The MCBs shall be suitable for 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz system with the fault level
of 10KS RMS symmetrical. The terminals of MCBs shall be suitable for use with eye lugs. The 4 pole, 3
pole and 2 pole MCBs shall be suitable for use with eye lugs. The 4 pole, 3 pole and 2 pole MCB knobs
shall be trucked with adequately strengthened tandem pin.
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Incoming of the lighting and power DB shall be provided with current operated Earth leakage circuit
breakers with a sensitivity of 30mA or as specified in the drawings. The ELCB shall have Trip free
mechanism and shall operate even on neutral failure.
The ELCN shall be provided with a test Button to simulate leakage and to test the ELCB. The ELCB shall
operate and switch off the circuit within 30 milli seconds in case of a fault.
The enclosures of the ELCB shall be molded from high quality insulating materials, which shall be fire
retardant, anti-tracking, non-tracking, non-hygroscopic, impact resistant and shall withstand high
temperature.
GROUNDING
The DBs shall be provided with two nos. brass earthing stud terminals with suitable nuts., washers etc. for
connection to earth bus outside the DB.
PAINTING
The steel surface shall be chemically cleaned to remove scale etc. rinsed, dried and shall be finished with
Epoxy paint. The shade shall be as per specific requirement sheets.
TESTING & INSPECTION
All routine and acceptance tests as per the relevant IS shall be carried out in presence of the purchaser or
his representative.
PACKING
All the equipment covered under this Specification shall be packed properly in order to avoid damages
during transit and during storage at site.
DRAWING & INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
Along the offer, the Contractor shall submit the following documents:
General arrangements drawings of DBs showing the various constructional features etc.
Single line diagram
138
Technical leaflets for MCB, ELCM etc
Type test reports as per IS.
After award of the contract, the manufacturer shall submit the following documents for approval.
General arrangements drawing of DBs showing various views and mounting details.
Arrangement of compartments.
Single line diagram.
Complete technical particulars of all equipment.
Commissioning and maintenance instruction for all equipment.
Set of re-produceable for all the above drawings.
Before manufacturer of the DBs, the supplier shall have to take approval for the design and drawings in
writing. Any manufacturing done prior to approval of drawings shall be rectified in accordance with the
approved drawings by the supplier at his own cost and the equipment shall be supplied within the
stipulated period. Time schedule for drawing documents shall be enclosed separately.
4.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES AND
ACCESSORIES
GENERAL:
This specification covers the requirements for design, manufacture and supply of PVC, FRLS cables for
Medium and High voltage systems and cable joining/ terminating accessories for high voltage / low
voltage systems.
The cables shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards:
IS:1554 (PART-I)
-
PVC insulated (heavy duty ) electric cables working voltage unto
and including 1100V
IS:7098 (PART-II)
-
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltage fro-1.1kV unto and including 33kV
IS:8130
-
Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS:5831
-
PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
IS:3975
-
Mild steel wires, stripes and tapes armouring of cables.
IS:2633-
-
Methods of testing weight, thickness and uniformity of coating on
hot dipped galvanised articles.
IS:209
-
Specification of zinc.
139
IS:3961 (PART-II)
.
-
Recommended current ratings for PVC insulated and PVC sheet had
heavy duty cables
IS:10418
-
Wooden drums for electric cables.
IEC:502
-
Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltage
from 1KV unto 30KV
IEC:540 & 540A
-
Test methods for insulation and sheaths of electric cables and
cords.
IS:10462 (PART-I)
-
Fictitious calculation method for determination of dimensions of
protective coverings of electrometric and thermoplastic insulated c
cables
IS:10810(PART-58)
-
Oxygen index test.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION:
The cables shall be suitable for laying in trays, trenches, ducts and conduits and for underground buried
installation with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water and chemicals.
Outer sheath of all PVC and XLPE cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of oxygen
index shall be 29 at 27 +/- 2 C. In addition, suitable chemicals shall be added into the PVC compound of
the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.
Sequential marking of the length of the cable in meters shall be provided on the outer sheath at every one
metre. The embossing shall be legible and indelible.
The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared in the technical information
furnished along with bids subject to a maximum tolerance of +/- 2mm.
PVC / Rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum with a minimum height of eight per
thousand metre length. In addition, ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with caps to avoid ingress
of water during transportation and storage.
SPECIFICATION FOR PVC CABLES
At power / control cables for use on medium voltage systems shall be heavy duty type, 1100 insulated ,
insulated, inner-sheathed, armoured and overall PVC sheathed as detailed below.
The contractors shall be ‘stranded’ for both aluminium and copper cables. Conductors of nominal area
less than 25sq. mm shall be circular only. Conductors of nominal area 25 sq.mm and above may be
circular or shaped. Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall have sizes as per Tables 1 of IS
1554(Part-I).
140
The core insulation shall be with PVC compound applied over the conductor by extrusion and shall
conform to the requirements of type ‘A’ compound as per IS:5831. The thickness of insulation and the
tolerance on thickness of insulation shall as per table 2 of IS:1554 part-I. Control cables having 6 crores
and above shall be identified with prominent and indelible Arabic numerals on the outer surface of the
insulation. Colour of the numbers shall contrast with the colour of insulation with a spacing of maximum
50mm between two consecutive numbers. Colour coding for cables unto 5 crores shall be as per Indian
Standard.
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid-up cores by extrusion and shall be of PVC conforming to
the requirements of TYPE STI PVC compound as per IS:5831. The minimum thickness of inner sheath
shall be as per Table 4 of IS:1554-Part-1.
Armouring for multi-core cables shall be by single round galvanised steel wires where the calculated
diameter below armouring does not exceed 13 mm and by galvanised steel strips where this dimension is
greater than 13 mm. Requirement and methods of tests for armour material and uniformity of
galvanisation shall be as per IS-3975 and IS-2633. The dimensions of armour shall be as per table 5 of IS1554 (part-1). Armouring for single core cable shall be with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire
of 2.5 sq.mm diameter.
The outer sheath for the cables shall be applied by extrusion and shall be of PVC compound conforming
to the requirements of type ST-1 compound as per IS:5831. The minimum thickness of outer sheath shall
be as per column-3 for both armoured and unarmoured cables.
SPECIFICATION FOR XLPE CABLES
The conductor shall be stranded and compacted circular for all cables.
All cables rated 1.1 / 3.8 /6.6kv and above shall be provided with both conductor screening and insulation
screening. The conductors shall be provided with non-metallic extruded semi conducting shielding.
The core insulation shall be with cross-linked polyethylene insulating compound applied by extrusion. It
shall be free from voids and shall withstand all mechanical and thermal stresses under steady state and
transient operating conditions. It shall conform to the properties given in Table -1 of IS:7098 (Part –II).
The insulating shielding shall consist of non-metallic extruded semi-conducting
combination with a non-magnetic metallic screening of copper screen shall be capable
insulation shielding shall consist of non- metallic extruded semi-conducting compound
with a non-single line to ground fault current.
compound in
of carrying the
in combination
The conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation screen shall all be extruded in one operation by
‘Triple Extrusion’ process to ensure perfect bonding between the layers. The core identification shall be
by coloured strips or by printed numerals.
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up crores by extrusion and shall conform to the
requirements of type ST2 compound of IS:5831. the extruded inner sheath shall be of uniform thickness.
For multicore cables, the armouring shall be by galvanised steel strips, if armouring is specified for single
core cables in the data sheet, the same shall be with H grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5
sq.mm diameter.
141
The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion after the armouring and shall be of PVC
compound conforming to the requirements of Type of IS:7098 part 2.( column 3 & 5 for both armoured
cables).
The dimensions of the insulation, inner sheath and armour materials shall be governed by values given in
Tables 2,3 and 4 (Method ‘b’) of IS:7098 PART-II.
SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE ACCESSORIES:
The termination and straight jointing kits for use on the systems shall be suitable for the type of cables
offered as per this specification.
The accessories shall be supplied in kit form. Each component of the kit shall the manufacture’s mark of
origin.
The kit shall included all stress grading. Insulation and sealing materials apart from conductor fittings and
consumable items. An insulation instruction sheet shall also be included in each kit.
The contents of the accessories kit including all consumables shall be suitable for storage without
deterioration at a temperature of 45 with self life extending to more than 5 years.
TERMINATING KITS: The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to an indoor
switchgear or to a weatherproof transformer / motor. For outdoor terminations, weather shields / sealing
ends and any other accessories required shall also from part of the kit. The terminating kits shall be one of
the marks / types mentioned in the preferred marks.
JOINTING KITS: The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation on overhead trays,
concrete lined trenches, and for underground burial with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding
by water and chemicals. These shall have protection against rodent and termite attack.
The cables shall be tested and examined at the manufacturer works both before and after manufacture.
The manufacture shall furnish all necessary information concerning the supply to consultant / Owner’s
Engineer. The Engineer shall have free access to the manufacture’s works for the purpose for the purpose
of inspecting the process of manufacture in all its stages and he will have the power to reject any material
which appears to him to be at unsuitable description or of unsatisfactory quality.
PVC & XLPE CABLES;
After completion of manufacture of cables and prior to dispatch the cables shall be subject to special tests
as detailed below. Consultant / owner reserves the right to witness all tests with sufficient advance notice
from vendor. The test reports for all cables shall be got approved from the Engineer before dispatch of the
cables.
All routine tests, acceptance tests and type tests shall be carried out on cables as listed in IS:1554 Part-1.
The inner and outer sheath of XLPE cables shall be subjected to all the tests applicable for PVC cables.
The test requirements for insulation and sheath of PVC cables shall be a per latest revision of IS:5831.
Following are the special tests to be performed on the cables and test results for similar type of cables
shall accompany the offer.
142
Accelerated water absorption test for insulation as per NEMA-WC-5.( For PVC insulated cables ) and as
per NEMA WC-7 (for XLPE) insulated cables).
Dielectric Retention Test: The dielectric strength of the cable insulation tested in accordance with NEMA
WC – 5 at 75 +/- 1 shall not less than 50% of the original dielectric strength. ( For PVC insulated cables).
Oxygen Index Test: The test shall be carried out as per ASTMD 2863 or applicable Indian standard
specification.
Test for rodent and termite repulsion property : The vendors shall furnish the test details to analyse the
property by chemical method.
CABLE ACCESSOTIES:
Type tests should have been carried out to prove the general qualities and design of given type of
termination / joining system. The type tests shall include the following tests conforming to VDE 0278/ IS
specification. The type test certificates shall be submitted alongwith the offer.
1.
Rated withstand AC voltage test
2.
Partial discharge test
3.
rated withstand surge voltage test
4.
Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load (Number of heating cycles-3)
5.
Partial discharge test
6.
Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load ( Number of heating cycles-3)
7.
Thermal short circuit test
8.
Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load
9.
Rated withstand surge voltage test
10 .
D.C.voltage test
11 .
Test under the influence of moisture
12 .
Dynamic short circuit test
PACKING AND MARKING
Cables shall be dispatched in non-returnable wooden drums of suitable barrel diameter, security battened,
with the take-off end fully protected against mechanical damage. The wood used for construction of the
drum shall be properly seasoned, sound and free from defect. Wood preservatives shall be applied to the
entire drum. Ferrous parts used shall be treated with a suitable rust preventive finish or coating to avoid
rusting during transit of storage.
143
On the flange of the drum, necessary information such as project title, manufacturer’s name, type size,
voltage, drum no., cable, BIS certification mark, gross weight etc. shall be printed. An arrow instruction
to show the direction of rotation of the drum.
Cables shall be supplied in drum lengths as follows:
Medium voltage power cables unto and including 6 sq.mm – 1000M
Medium voltage power cables from 10sq.mm unto and including 300 sq.mm- 500M
Control cables unto and including 27 crores 1000M
A tolerance of plus or minus 5% shall be permissible for each drum. However, overall tolerance on each
size of cable shall be limited to +/-2%. Offers with short / non-standard lengths are liable for rejection.
5.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works, inspection and delivery at site and
installation of lighting fittings and their associated accessories The light fittings and their associated
accessories such as lamps / types, reflector, housings, ballasts etc. shall comply with the latest applicable
standards.
All luminaries, lamps and accessories shall be same make.
Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation under hot humid atmospheric conditions,
at an ambient of 50 C, without reduction in lamp life or without deterioration of materials and internal
wiring. Outdoor fittings shall be weather proof and rain proof type.
The fittings shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including cleaning, replacement of
lamps/ starters etc.
Connectors between different components shall be made in such a way that they will not work loose by
small vibration.
For each type of light fitting the MANUFACTURER shall supply the utilisation factor to indicate the
proportion of the light emitted by the bare lamp which falls on the working plane.
The fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps.
The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rise, the temperature rise above the
ambient temperature shall be as indicated in the relevant standards.
All mercury vapour and metal halide fittings shall be complete with accessories like lamps, ballasts,
power factor improvement capacitors, starters / igniters wherever applicable, etc.
Outdoor type fitting shall be provided with outdoor type control gear box the fittings shall be power factor
corrected to 0.95 lagging (maximum).
144
Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out and T-off connection. The internal
wiring shall be complete by the MANUFACTURER by means of stranded copper wire and terminated on
the terminal block.
All hardware used in the luminaries shall be cadmium plated.
EARTHING
Each light fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for connection to the earthing
conductor.
All metal of metal enclosed parts of the housing shall be bonded to the earthing terminal so as to ensure
satisfactory earth continuity throughout the fixture.
PAINTING / FINISH
All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The fittings shall be free from
scale, rust, sharp edges and burrs.
The housing shall be stove – enamelled / epoxy stove-enamelled / vitreous enamelled or anodised as
indicated under various types of fitting.
The finish of the fitting shall be such that no bright spots are produced either by direct light source or by
reflection.
LIGHT FITTINGS
HPSV / HPMV / MH FLOOD LIGHT LUMINAIRE (for canopy area/ Hoardings):
Flood light fixture suitable for HPSV/ HPMV/ MH lamps consists of cast aluminium alloy housing with
heat dissipating fins. Heat resistant and toughened glass in front is held by a weatherproof gasket and
aluminium frame assembly. It shall have anodised aluminium reflector. Re lamping facility shall be made
simple without disturbing the previously set aiming. It shall be provided with galvanised MS mounting
bracket which will have facility to fix the fixture in any position. It shall be provided with the protractor
for angle adjustment.
HPMV MH HIGH / MID / LOW BAY LUMINAIRE (for Canopy area / Hoardings):
High / NID / LOW bay fixture suitable for HPSV / HPMV / MH consists of reflector made out of high
purity aluminium and anodised. The integral control gear shall be housed in a cast aluminium housing
which will have cooling fins. It shall have a strong MS bracket with an anti vibration eyebolt.
HPSV/ HPMV/ METAL HALIDE STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRE (for Yard Lighting):
Street light fixture suitable for HPSV / HPMV lamp consists of cast aluminium housing, stove enameled
grey outside and white with an anodised aluminium reflectors and highly transparent clear acrylic sheet
cover with hinge and toggle fastening, neoprene gaskets and integrated prewired ballasts etc.
POST TOP LANTERN ( for Landscape Lighting) :
145
The luminaries shall have die cast aluminium spigot complete with integral copper wound control gear.
PF correction capacitor mounted in canopy, lamp holder and suitable rated lamps. The diffuser / cover
shall be opal acrylic HDP in double conical shape.
LOW LEVEL GARDEN LIGHTNG (BOLLARDS) (for Landscaped Lighting):
The luminaries shall comprise of acrylic diffuser mounted on suitable MS pillar which shall house
suitable control gears, starters, capacitors. The luminaire shall be suitable for GLS/ PL lamps.
FLURESCENT TUBE LIGHT FITTING WITH STOVE ENAMELLED OPEN REFLECTOR (for
Sales Building):Industrial type fixture suitable for 2x40W 1x40W fluorescent lamp consist of reflector, made from CFCA
sheet steel finished in stove enamel gray outside & white inside.
ACID PROOF FLUORESCENT TUBE LIGHT (for Battery rooms )
It shall be suitable for 2x40W / 1x40W fluorescent lamp comprises of rubber gasketted cast aluminium
control gear housing with detachable cover incorporating ballasts, starters, capacitors and connector
block. It shall be specially designed with rubber gasket to prevent entry of corrosive vaporous or dust.
MIRROR OPTICS FLURESCENT TUBE LIGHT (for Sales Building):
It shall be suitable for 2x40W / 1x40W fluorescent lamp comprises of CRCA sheet steel housing finished
in stove enamel while inside and gray outside. Mirrors made of high purity anodised aluminium sheet,
giving a very high light output, with wide spread light distribution.
DECORATIVE FLUORESCENT TUBE LIGHT (for Sales Building )
It shall be suitable for 2x40W / 1x40W fluorescent lamp comprises of sheet steel housing fabricated from
CRCA sheet steel, finished in stove enamel white inside and outside. It shall consist of Acrylic diffuser
which is supported by brown high impact polystyrene end plates.
CHANNEL MOUNTED TUBE LIGHT WITHOUT REFLECTOR (for DG / Compress / Electrical
rooms):
It shall be suitable for 1x40W /2x40W fluorescent lamps made out of CRCA sheet steel finished in gray
stove enamel. The cover plate shall be finished in white stove enamel.
100W INCANDESCENT BULK HEAD FITTING (for Peripheral of Building):
It shall be suitable for GLS lamp unto 100W and comprises of die cast aluminium alloy body, prismatic
heat resistant glass cover held with a weatherproof gasket in a MS galvanised wire guard. It shall be
painted in white stove enamel inside and grey outside.
COMPACT FLUORESCENT FITTING (Sales Building):
146
It shall be suitable for 9 /11 / 18W CFL, suitable for surface mounting and recessed mounting and made
of CRCA sheet steel housing, finished in stove enamel white inside and gray outside, fitted with high
purity anodised aluminium reflector and complete with control gear.
REFLECTORS
The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel / aluminium / silvered glass as indicated for abovementioned fitting.
The thickness of steel / aluminium shall comply with relevant standards. Reflectors made of steel shall
have stove enamelled / epoxy coating finish. Aluminium used for reflectors shall be anodised / epoxy
stove enamelled / mirror polished.
Reflectors shall be free from scratches or blisters and shall have a smooth and glossy surface having an
optimum light reflecting contractor-efficient such as to ensure the overall light output specified by the
manufacturer.
Reflectors shall be readily removable from the housing for cleaning and maintenance without disturbing
the lamps and without the use of tools, they shall be securely fixed to the housing by means of positive
fastening device of captive type.
LAMP / STARTER HOLDERS
Lamp holders shall comply with relevant standards. They shall have low contact resistance, shall be
resistance to wear and shall be suitable for operation at the specified temperature without deterioration in
insulation value. They shall hold the lamps in position under normal condition of shock and vibration met
within normal installation and use.
Lamp holders for the fluorescent lamps shall be of the spring loaded bi-pin rotor type. Live parts of the
lamp holder shall not be exposed during insertion or removal of the lamp. The lamp holder contacts shall
provide adequate pressure on the lamp cap pins when in working position.
Lamp holders for incandescent, mercury vapour & metal halide lamps shall be of Edison screw (E.S)
type. Starter holders for fluorescent lamps shall conform to the relevant standards. All material used in the
construction of the holder shall be suitable for tropical use.
The starter holders shall be so designed that they are mechanically robust and free from any operational
difficulties. They shall be capable of withstanding the shocks met within normal transit, installation and
us e .
BALLASTS
The ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance with the relevant standards. The
ballasts shall be designed to have a long service life and low power loss.
Ballasts shall be mounted using sell locking, anti vibration fixing and shall be easy to remove without
demounting the fittings. They shall be in dust-tight, non-combustible enclosures.
The ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy-duty type, filled with thermosetting, insulating, moisture
repellent, polyester compound filled under vacuum. Ballasts shall be provided with tapings to set the
voltage within the range specified. End connections and taps shall be brought out in a suitable terminal
147
block, rigidly fixed to the ballast enclosure. The ballast enclosure. The ballast wiring shall be of copper
wire shall be free from hum. Ballasts which produce humming sound shall be replaced free of cost by the
contractor.
Separate ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi lamp fittings. The ballasts for metal
halide lamps shall not be constant wattage type.
STARTERS
Starters shall have bimetal electrodes and high mechanical strength. Starters shall be replaceable without
disturbing the reflector or lamps and without the use of any tool. Starters shall have brass contacts and
radio interference capacitor.
The starters shall generally conform to the relevant standards.
CAPACITORS
The capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected across the supply of
individual lamp circuits.
The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at supply voltage as specified and shall have a value of
capacitance so as to correct the power factor of its corresponding lamp circuit to the extent of 0.95 lag.
The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed preferably on a metal enclosure to prevent seepage of
impregnant and ingress of moisture.
LAMPS
Incandescent (GLS) lamps shall be of ‘clear’ type unless otherwise specified.
The fluorescent lamps shall be ‘Cool Day Light” type unless otherwise specified and shall be provided
with features to avoid blackening of lamp ends. The lamp shall have triple coil electrode with an anode
ring and a triband phospher coating.
Mercury halide lamp shall be provided with internal diffuse coating and the average lumen output shall be
19000 lumen for 250W and 32000 lumens for 400W and the lamp voltage shall not exceed 100V for
250W and 128V for 400W. The colour rendering index of the lamp shall be 93. the lamp shall be suitable
for universal burning position and for use in open type luminaire.
The lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the connections at lead in wires and
filaments / electrodes shall not break under such circumstances.
Lamps/ tubes shall conform to relevant standards and shall be suitable for supply voltage and frequency
specified.
CEILING FANS:
The ceiling fans shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per IS:374. The fans shall have totally
enclosed capacitor start and run motor suitable for operating on 240V, single phase, 50Hz AC supply
system. The fan shall be of double bearing type, having 3 blades with a sweep of 1200 / 1400 mm
complete with suspension rod, canopies and mounting rollers. The regulators shall be modular type
electronic step less regulator suitable for mounting on modular switch boxes.
148
EXHAUST FANS :
The exhaust fans shall be of industrial type designed, manufactured and tested as per IS:2312 and
operating on 240v, single phases, 50Hz, AC supply system. The exhaust fan shall be of ring-mounted
type and shall be complete with louvers. It shall be designed for opening and closing automatically with
air flow velocity. A separate bird screen made of brass wire mesh shall be provided with steel framework
on the outer wall.
WIRES
PVC insulated multistranded copper wires of 1100V grade as per IS:694 and ISI Certification shall be
used.
The type and size of wires to be used shall be as indicated in the BOQ & drawings.
The following colour code shall be adopted for the wiring:
Three phase wiring
:
Red, Yellow, Blue
Single Phase wiring
:
Red / Yellow / Blue
Switched phase ( wire from switch :
to light fan, bell, 5A socket etc)
White
Neutral
:
Black
Earth
:
Green
No joint is permitted in the run of wires.
SWITCHES
Switches, manufactured in accordance with IS:3854 shall be used. Switches in areas where concealed
wiring has been adopted shall be flush mounting piano / modular type unless otherwise specified.
RECEPTACLES
Only three-pin type receptacles manufactured in accordance with IS:1293 shall be used with the third
terminal connected to the earth. All receptacles shall be provided with a switch mounted on the same
enclosure but shall be a separate unit to facilitate replacement by part. Flush mounting type receptacles
shall be used in areas where concealed wiring has been adopted and surface type shall be used in other
areas.
OUTLET BOXES
Outlet boxes for sockets, switches, fixtures and fan regulators etc. shall be of minimum 16 gauge or as
specified. M. S. Sheet 2.5”deep. Junction / Outlet boxes shall be used in roof slab where concealed
wiring has been adopted. Front cover plate shall be of sheet steel in areas where surface wiring has been
adopted. For concealed wiring the front cover plate shall be of Formica or modular front plate of
approved equivalent with colour to suit the walls. Outlet boxes shall be electro-galvanised after
fabrication. Cover plate shall be fixed by cadmium plated brass screw and suitable C.P. brass cup
washers. Samples of these shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
149
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Conduit shall be minimum 16 gauge ERW or GI or Polyethylene as specified. Generally, polyethylene
conduits shall be used in concealed wiring and for surface wiring GI conduits in industrial building and
ERW conduit in non-industrial building shall be used.
Care shall be taken to see that all conduit ends have no burrs and ends are neatly renamed to avoid
damage to wires. All metal conduit accessories shall be only of threaded type. Pin grip or clamp type
accessories are not acceptable. Samples of these shall be furnished for approval by Engineer-in-Charge at
site, before installation.
The maximum number of PVC insulated wires which can be drawn in conduits of various sizes shall be
as given below:
Nominal Cross sectionals area in Sq mm
Sizes of Conduits
Mm
20mm
25mm
32mm
40
1.5
5
10
12
-
2.5
5
8
12
-
4.0
3
6
8
-
6.0
2
5
7
-
10.0
2
4
5
8
16.0
-
2
3
6
STREET LIGHT POLES
Lighting poles shall be fabricated as per drawings from seamless pipes of specified section, with joints,
swaged together when hot and beveled on outside edges, poles shall be coated with bituminous
preservative solution, throughout on the inside surface and on the ground portion of the outside surface.
Remainder of the outside surface shall be given one coat of red oxide primer and finished with two coats
of aluminium paint. Each pole shall be provided with a outdoor junction box which contains terminal
connectors ( size and the number of terminals shall be as per requirement) and 6A SPN MCB for local
control. GI conduit shall be embedded in muff for incoming and outgoing cables. Foundation for lighting
poles will be made by the electrical conductor and the cost for the same including supply of cement and
all the reconnected materials shall be deemed to have been included in the erection of pole. Lighting poles
shall be numbered serially as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHING FOR ELECTIRCAL WORKS
GENERAL
The contractor shall provide the complete bonding & earthing of the neutral point of power system & non
current carrying metal parts of all electrical equipments & apparatus.
150
Each & every piece of electrical equipments & apparatus shall be connected to the main earth bus by
means of branch main connection of earth continuity conductors.
All electrical equipments, except those operating at extra low voltages shall be provided with an earth
terminal.
All types of electrodes comprising an earth system shall be connected together with a continuous ring of
earth conductor. After installation tests shall be made to ascertain that the earth resistance hereinafter
specified is obtained. If the required resistance value cannot be obtained, a sufficient number of
additional electrodes shall be installed until the resultant resistance not exceeding the specified value can
be obtained.
In all cases, the electrodes shall be driven such that the zones of earthing do not overlap.
Each earth electrode shall be connected to its associated earth conductor through a linked connection. The
link shall be installed as close to the earth electrodes as possible. Each earth electrodes shall be enclosed
together with the link in a reinforced concrete hand hole with slab cover, which shall be set flush with the
ground.
A continuous earth ring of GI flat as specified shall be provided in the electrical room and connected to
the earth electrodes. The resistance between any point on each earthing system and the earth electrodes
shall not exceed 1 ohm. The overall resistance between the earthing installation and the general mass of
earth shall be less than 1 ohm.
All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed properly. All metal conduits,
trunking cables, switch gears, distribution boards, lift fitting and all other parts made of metal shall be
bounded together & connected by means of specified earthing conductor to all efficient earthing system.
All earthing shall be in conformity with Indian Electricity Rules.
EARTHING CONDUCTORS:
Earthing conductors shall be of electrolytic copper / GI & shall be protected against mechanical injury or
corrosion. Zinc coating shall be as per latest IS codes.
SIZING OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS:
The cross-sectional area of copper earthing conductor shall not be smaller than the largest current
carrying conductor subject to an upper limit of 80 sqmm. If the area of the largest current carrying
conductor or busbars exceeds 160 sqmm than two or more earthing conductors shall be used in parallel, to
provide at least half the cross sectional area of the current carrying conductor or busbars. All fixture
outlets, boxes & junction boxes shall be earthed with multi-stranded copper wires.
All three phase switches & distribution boards unto 60 amps, rating shall be earthed with 2 nos. distinct &
independent 3 mm dia GI wires. All three phase switches & distribution boards unto 100amps. Rating
shall be earthed with 2 nos. distinct & independent 4 mm dia GI wires. All 200 amp & above switches
shall be earthed with minimum of 2 nos. separate & independent 40 mm X 6 mm GI strip.
EARTH PIT DETAILS:
Copper/ Galvanised / cast iron earth plate of 60x60x0.6 cm / 1200x1200x1.2 cms in size buried in
specifically prepared earth pit of 1.5 meters below ground level with 40kg charcoal & salt with alternate
151
layers of charcoal & salt with 90mm dia GI pipe with funnel with funnel with wire mesh for watering &
brick masonry block cover, heavy duty CI cover complete as per IS 3043 with necessary length of double
GI earth wire of 6 SWG bolted with lug to plate with cadmium plated GI nut-bolts & covered in 12 mm
dia GI pipe 2.5 meters long complete connected to nearest switch gears as directed & duly tested by earth
tester.
Pipe electrodes shall be of 3 M long 40mm or 100 mm dia class B GI pipe. The GI pipes shall be
provided with holes at regular intervals as per IS 3043.
RESISTANCE TO EARTH
The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 1.0 ohm.
7.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SIZTRIBUTION SYSTEM
GENERAL
The telephone system shall include providing main/ sub distribution frames, interconnecting cabling, tag
blocks inside the buildings, interconnecting telephone wires between tag block and telephone socket
outlets. The telephone socket outlet shall be modular type or as specified in the bill of quantities.
MAIN TAG BLOCK
The main / sub distribution frame shall be enclosed type made out of CRCA sheet steel of suitable
thickness (2 to 3.15 mm). This shall house necessary number of terminations with tags as specified with
provision for terminating incoming and outgoing cables. The terminations and the frame shall be of
standard make.
The frame shall be suitable for outdoor application with IP55 protection.
This shall be mounted on suitable civil foundation with necessary GI pipe sleeves for taking incoming
and outgoing cables.
Outdoor termination block, if require to be used, shall be with weather proof enclosure with locking
facility housed with necessary brick and RCC foundation and excavation in soil etc. as required.
TELEPHONE CABLES
All telephone cables shall be PVC insulated, copper conductor conforming to latest IS and IEC standards.
Telephone cables shall be armoured/un armoured to suit the nature of application and indicated in the Bill
of quantities.
All cable shall be run in vertical or horizontal trunking, conduits or cable trays suitable prepared for
distribution and separated from electrical cabling/ wiring in an appropriate manner so as to eliminate
electromagnetic interference. All telephone locations to be in accordance with Owners requirements.
All cables shall be identified by tags and schedule identifying each termination to be issued to the client
upon completion of the cabling installation.
152
TELEPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS
Telephone termination block shall be Krone make as per latest standards. The termination block should
have loop in-loop out arrangements as required.
8.
INSTALLATION
The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules, the Codes of
practice of the Bureau of Indian Standards and other relevant regulations.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARDS
Switch Boards shall be floor mounted in the room on the pre-formed trenches constructed with top /
bottom entry for cables or free standing on floor with top entry for cables.
The portion of the trenches which is not covered by the switch board shall be covered with 6 mm thick
checkered steel plates with suitable reinforcement if required.
All unused cable entries shall be closed with suitable blind plugs or plates made from 4 mm thick sheet
steel bolted to the gland plates.
MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD
MCB Distribution Board shall be fixed with bolts and nuts grouted to the wall concealed in the
cupboards / niches provided or flushed / semi flushed directly into the wall.
WIRING
PVC insulated wires shall be drawn through concealed PVC conduits / open metal conduits.
The wires of a circuit shall not run through the conduits switch/ socket boxes of another circuit. A
common draw box with hylam barrier separating individual circuit wires may be adopted to minimise
the number of draw boxes.
Wires shall be terminated at the switch boxes with suitable crimping type tinned copper lugs.
The wiring shall be carried out by looping the phase conductors at the switch box and the neutral
conductors at the light, fans and sockets. For coping of wires in switch boxes, shrouded type multiway
10A/20A rated connectors shall be used.
CIRCUIT WIRING
The circuit wiring shall be from MCB distribution boards to first switch box and looping to the
consecutive switch box in the circuit including conduits and accessories.
POINT WIRING
The following shall be deemed to be included in light / Ceiling Fan / Exhaust fan / Call bell / 6A socket
points:
153
a.
Conduit & Conduit accessories (bends, tee, deep junction boxes, fan book boxes) from switch
box to point.
b.
Wiring of point from switch to point.
c.
Earth wring of each point from switch to point.
d.
Fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, phil plug, rent plug etc. as required.
e.
Modular range of plate type cover plate, control switch, box etc.
f.
Junction boxes, pull boxes etc.
g.
Connectors for termination of point.
h.
Ceiling rose / Angles holder / Battern holder for light points.
i.
6A socket outlet for Exhaust fan.
j.
6A socket outlet and switch for socket points.
k.
Cutting and chasing the wall for conduit & boxes installation and making good the same in
original finish after installation complete as required.
The point writing shall be classified as the following:
a.
Short point - unto 3 mtrs.
b.
Medium point - unto 6 mtrs.
c.
Long point - unto 10 mtrs.
TELEPHONE WIRE
The telephone wire shall be drawn in the conduits provider for the purpose. It shall be terminated with
standard termination accessories at the end of socket pin and Telephone junction boxes.
SWITCH / SOCKET BOXES
Switch / Socket Boxes shall be concealed in the wall and the mounting height of the boxes shall be as
indicated in the drawings. Generally the lighting switch box will be + 1350 mm from FLL and sockets
will be at 450 mm from FFL.
The switch and socket front plates shall project beyond the switch / socket box. In the case of concealed
conduit wring, the joints between the box and the surrounding plaster is covered by the cover plate. The
cover plate shall be fixed with brass cup washers and full threaded brass screws.
CELING FANS
Concealed type fan hook boxes shall be provided for mounting of the ceiling fans.
154
The fan shall be fixed to the hook in such a way that the canopy covers the opening of the fan hook box.
Necessary down rods and other accessories shall be included as required for complete operation.
EXHAUST FANS
Exhaust fans shall be mounted on an MS ring which shall be 100 mm to 300 mm below the ceiling level.
The boxes shall be covered with 3 mm thick hylam sheet of approved colour. In case of concealed flush
mounting, the hylam sheet shall project 6 mm beyond the box so that the joint between the box and the
surrounding plaster is covered by the sheet. The hylam sheet shall be fixed to the box with brass cup
washers and full threaded brass screws.
LUMINARES
The installation of luminaires shall be at fixed locations indicated in the drawings with necessary fixing
accessories.
CABLES
The underground cable shall be laid in excavated trenches outside the building. The trenches shall be
excavated to a depth of not less than 800 mm and the cables shall be laid at a depth of 750 mm.
The cables shall be laid over a 50 mm thick sand cushion at bottom and 250 mm on top of cable and shall
be with bricks at either ends of trench and protected at top by slab / bricks. The gap between the cables
and the bricks shall be filled with sand. Above the brick, for 150 mm the cable trench shall be filled with
sand, after that for 400 mm ( i.e.) unto formed ground level the cable trench shall be back filled suitably
with soil.
The cable trench shall have the widths as indicated by suitably excavating in all types of soil to attain the
required width.
Cable markers shall be installed at every 30 m internal along all straight lines and at bends. The cable
markers shall be of cast iron and shall have a clear and legible inscription “LT CABLE”.
Wherever cables are required to enter the building the cable shall be drawn through hume pipe or GI pipe.
Suitable packing shall be made at both ends of the pipes. Cables inside building shall be run in cable
trays.
Where cables are required to cross the roads, cables and pipes of other services the cable shall be drawn
through hume pipe or GI pipe. Suitable sealing shall be made at both ends of the pipes.
Vertical runs of cables along the wall shall be laid through GI pipe of suitable diameter unto a height of
900 mm above finished floor level. The GI pipe shall be clipped to the wall with GI clamps and GI
screws. The distance between the clamps shall not exceed 400 mm.
The cable laying shall be done in such a way that there is no damage / injury to the cable. Adequate care
shall be taken while pulling cable from drum and white laying.
Sharp bends shall be avoided in the runs. The bending radius shall not be less than 12 times the diameter
of the cables.
No joints shall be permitted in the runs of the cables unto a run of 500 Metres.
155
Where more than one cable has to be laid along the same route, the cables shall be laid horizontally
touching each other and not one above the other.
The armour of the cables shall be effectively earthed at termination point through cable glands.
Suitable phase identifiers shall be provided at the terminals.
The cables shall be laid in performed trenchers wherever required. The performed trench shall be RCC
casting on all the sides. 50x50x6 mm MS angle at required intervals shall be fixed to the casting. The
performed trench shall be covered with RCC cover which shall be capable of taking the heavy vehicular
load. The wall thickness of performed trench shall be suitable to take all type of loads.
STREET LIGHT POLES
Poles for external lighting shall be installed along the road / pathway edges as indicated in the drawing
and shall be provided with cement concrete foundation below the ground level and above the ground
level.
The concrete used for the foundation shall be fixed in 1:2:4 proportions with stone aggregate of 20 mm
nominal size. Concreting shall be done solidly to avoid honey combing using shuttering.
The depth and height of the concrete work shall be as per requirement of the pole heights.
STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRE
The luminaire shall be installed at the locations indicated over the poles. The lamps shall be fixed after
the luminaries are installed.
LIST OF MAKE OF COMPONENTS FOR PANEL
1.
Switch Fuse Units
-
L&T
2.
MCCB
-
L&T
3.
Change Over Switches
-
L&T
4.
UG cables
-
Unistar / CCI
5.
6A Switch / Socket
-
MK
6.
Wiring Cables
-
Finolex
7.
MCB DB, MCB
-
MDS
8.
Capacitor
-
Universal / Asian
9.
Volt meter / Ammeter
-
AE
10 .
Voltmeter / Ammeter Switch
-
AE
SPECIFICATION FOR PANEL
156
System :
The switch Board shall be suitable for operation on 3 phase, 4 wire, 415/433v, 50 cycles.
Standards :
The design, manufacturing of the various equipment covered by this specification shall comply with the
latest edition of the relevant Indian Standard and Indian Electricity Rules and Regulation.
Constructions :
The switch board shall be cubicle type and fabricated out of 16SWG CRCA sheet steel. The base frame
shall be made out of ISMC 100/75.
The Board shall be totally enclosed design, completely dust tight and vermin proof. Soft compressible
gasket shall be provided between all metal joints, doors and covers to ensure the switch board as dust and
vermin proof.
Self Threading screws shall not be used in the construction of switch boards. All hardware used shall be
hot dip galvanized.
All similar materials and removal parts of switch board shall be interchangeable.
The switch board shall be provided with lifting lugs for easy lifting.
Separate cable compartment shall be provided for incoming /outgoing cable.
Busbars :
The busbars shall be made of high conductivity, electro litic copper and shall be housed in a separate
compartment.
The busbars shall have suitable and uniform cross sectional area through out the length and to carry the
specified rate of current and to with stand the fault level.
The busbars shall be fully covered with heat shrinkable colour coded PVC sleeves. The inter connections
shall be sleeved with colour coded PVC sleeves / insulation tapes.
The busbars shall be supported on suitable, durable anti-cracking insulation support at short intervals to
with stand the forces due to short circuit in the system.
The minimum clearance between phases and body shall be maintained.
The busbar chamber shall be adequately ventilated with wire mesh protection.
Earthing :
All metallic parts of the switch board other than the current carrying parts shall be connected to
the earth bus of size 25X3 mm copper flat or suitable size.
Painting :
157
All steel work shall undergo the relevant process to obtain a perfect smooth surface and whole
shall be powder coated with necessary treatment. The colour shall be simens grey.
158
TECHNICAL – SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SUPPLY AND LAYING
OF
PRECAST CEMENT CONCRETE
INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCKS
159
INDEX
I.
Scope Of Work.
II. Technical Specification
1. Paver Block Manufacturing Facilities.
2. Raw Materials.
3. Specifications for coloured Paver Blocks
4. Specifications for reflective type Paver Blocks
5. Paver Block Characteristics.
6. Paver Block Dimensions.
7. Testing of Paver Blocks.
8. Laying of Paver Blocks.
9. Laying Patterns.
160
I. Scope Of Work
The scope of work includes manufacturing , supplying and laying of
precast paver blocks at various Retail outlets. The work includes:
1.1
Verification of the existing site condition and advising our project incharge
to lay suitable base course if required. Contractors are required to satisfy
themselves with quality of sub-grade, sub-base course before the paver
blocks are laid and suggest strengthening if required .
1.2
Clearing the site by removing all obstacles such as stones, debris etc. for
laying of paver blocks.
1.3
Manufacturing of paver blocks in your plant as per requirements in
technical specification enclosed.
1.4
Supplying of paver blocks at site , including handling at both ends .
1.5
Laying of paver blocks at site as per requirement in technical specification,
within shortest possible time .The site being existing operating Retail
Outlets , care should be taken to ensure that the operation is not closed . The
job of laying may required to be carried out during night also .
1.6
Testing of paver blocks through reputed Govt./Non Govt. Test house and
submission of test results as per requirements in technical specifications.
HPCL reserves the right to carryout tests at random. Cost for such tests to
be borne by party.
1.
The contractor shall guarantee that all material and components
designed,fabricated ,supplied and laid by him shall be free from any type of
defect due to faulty material and/or workmanship/laying for a period of
One year from the date of completion of work at individual sites. However,
free Maintenance for two years shall be rendered by the contractor.
161
II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
II.1 Paver Block Manufacturing Facilities
The Paver Block shall be made in factory with following minimum facilities:
II.1.1 Concrete Blockmaking Machines:
The machine should be capable of producing high quality Paver Blocks by obtaining high
level of compaction by application of hydraulic compaction and also by high intensity
vibration to the moulds. The machine should have automatic control panel for uniformity
in strength.
II.1.2 Concrete Batching & Mixing Plant:
The concrete Mix Design should be followed for each batch of materials. The concrete
ingredient should be mixed in concrete Batching & Mixing plant. The plant should
equipped with automatic control panel for maintaining water cement ratio from batch to
batch to obtain concrete of uniform quality and strength. The plant should be equipped
with adequate mechanism for mechanised loading of raw materials into mixer and
conveyor belt for transportation of concrete from mixer to concrete block making
machine to maintain quality of wet cement.
II.1.3 Curing:
The factory should have well designed curing area to ensure adequate curing of paver blocks.
II.1.4 Laboratory
The factory should have the following:
(i)
Compression testing machine of adequate capacity
(ii)
Other tools and equipment for testing raw materials and paver blocks.
(iii) (1). Systematic record of test results of various paver blocks manufactured in the
factory .
(2) Concrete Mix Design for various grade of concrete used for making of paver
roads
162
II.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
2.
Raw Materials.
II.2.1 CEMENT
The cement used in the manufacture of high quality precast concrete paving
blocks shall be conforming to IS 12269 (53 grade ordinary portland cement) or
IS 8112 (43 grade ordinary portland cement) .
The minimum cement content in concrete used for making paver blocks should
be 380 kg/CuM.
II.2.2 AGGREGATES
The fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or
uncrushed materials which, apart from the grading requirements comply with
IS 383-1970.The fine aggregates used shall contain a minimum of 25% natural
silicon sand. Lime stone aggregates shall not be used. Aggregates shall contain
not more than 3% by weight of clay & shall be free from deleterious salts and
contaminants.
II.2.3 WATER
The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter. It shall meet the
requirements stipulated in IS:456- 2000.The amount of water to be used in
concrete mix should be based on optimum water content required for
consistency of cement paste and having no slump depending upon the
compaction capacity of the block making machine. The water cement ratio
shall not be more than 0.36.
II.2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
Any other materials/ingredients used in the concrete shall conform to
respective BIS Specifications.
163
II. Technical Specifications
3. SPECIFICATIONS FOR COLOURED PAVER BLOCKS
Coloured concrete paver blocks shall be manufactured as per attached specifications using approved
colour Pigment of “ BAYER” make “ BAYFERROX IRONOXIDE PIGMENTS” with minimum colour
pigment of 3 % by weight of cement. The colour shall be “ RED” or as selected by HPCL from colour
pigment manufacturar’s shade card & sample shall be approved by HPCL before commencement of the
work. Grey OPC 53 grade /43 grade cement shall be used for coloured pavers to obtain the desired
shade. The job also includes providing 50 mm thick sand bedding to match the shade of the paver block.
The colour of the Paver Block shall be guaranteed against fading of colour for a period of 12 months
from the date of laying of the same at site.
All other technical specifications & procedure for testing,laying & sampling of coloured pavers
will be as per attachment.
164
II. Technical Specifications .
4.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE TYPE PAVER
BLOCKS
The Paver blocks shall be made in two layers . Top layer shall be 10 to 15 mm & balance for bottom
layer. Both the layers shall be mixed to achieve desired compressive strength mentioned under “ Testing
of paver blocks.”
Top layer shall have 10 to 15 mm uniform thickness made out of Granite/Quartz crushed aggregated of
cubical sizes not more that 6 mm and downsize( shall have good abrasion resistant properties) as
wearing layer and relective coating & cement shall be mixed with UV resistant pigment and colour as
per HPCL’s selection and without impairing the characteristic properties of cement. Top surface shall be
made anti skid (indentations) with lacquer coating finish. (Pls. Also refer clause no.3,under Chapter II
Technical specifications.)
Approved admixture (confirming to IS9103) ,if required, shall be used as per manufacturer’s
recommendation & as per IS 456.
Compaction -Compaction of moulds shall be done by mechanical vibrators. The vibrator
should vibrate in both horizontal & vertical directions simultaneously. Mould should be
retained minimum 1& 1/2 minutes on table type vibrator’s platform.
Curing : The rubber moulds shall be placed tightly closed so that they are not exposed to
outside atmosphere. Steam or mist curing to be done for minimum 24 hours period.
After curing the pavers shall be spread for spread for drying and then HPCL approved
laquer coating shall be applied to give the top surface of block a smooth & shiny finish
free of pot holes. Laquer coating to be applied as per manufacturer’s specifications.
The lacquer coating & colour of the Paver Block shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from
the date of laying of the same at site .the top surface shall have no pin holes & should be dense. The
coloured pigment & laquer coating should not be harmful to concrete.
All other technical specifications & procedure for testing, laying & sampling of reflective type pavers
will be as per attachment.
165
II. Technical Specifications .
5. Pavers Block Characteristics
1.
The concrete pavers should confirm to IS 2185,IS 456 & IS 1238 or ASTM C 936 or
CSA A 231.2-95.
2.
The concrete pavers should be unipaver shape.
3..
The surface should be of anti skid type. The top surface shall have no pinholes &
should be densed. The coloured pigment & laquer coating,if provided, should not be
harmful to concrete.
4.
The concrete pavers should have perpendicularities after release from the mould
and the same should be retained until the laying.
5. .
The paver should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of surface
run off.
6.
The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2mm to 3mm to ensure
compacted sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.
7.
The concrete mixing to be done in batching plants. Rubber moulds to be used to achieve
better edges.
8.
The concrete mix design should be followed for each batch of materials
separately and automatic batching plant is to be used to achieve uniformity in
strength and quality.
9.
The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer or double layer.
10.
Compaction -Compaction of moulds shall be done by mechanical vibrators. The vibrator
should vibrate in both horizontal & vertical directions simultaneously. Mould should be
retained minimum 1& 1/2 minutes on table type vibrator’s platform.
11.
Curing : The rubber moulds shall be placed tightly closed so that they are not exposed to
outside atmosphere. Steam or mist curing to be done for minimum 24 hours period.
12.
After curing the pavers shall be spread for spread for drying .
13.
Skilled labour should be employed for laying blocks to ensure line and level of
laying, desired shape of the surface and adequate compaction of the sand in the
Joints.
14.
The pavers shall be of cement grey colour without any pigment or coloured
Pavers or relective type as per attached specifications.
166
II.4.9 The pavers are to be skirted all round with kerbing using solid concrete blocks of size
100mm X 200mm X 400mm. The kerbing should be embedded for 100mm depth. The
concrete used for kerbing shall be cured properly for 7 days minimum.
167
II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
6.
PAVER BLOCK DIMENSIONS
Thickness
Shape
Chamfer
Colour
60mm / 80 mm/100mm
Uniregular (Uniform Shape with no
Hollow Or Cracks)
4mm to 6mm along top edges
A. Natural cement grey colour
without use of any pigment
B. For coloured pavers refer
“Specifications for coloured pavers”
C. For reflective type pavers ,pls.
Refer “Specfications for reflective
type pavers.
Dimensional Tolerance
(+/-) 2mm for Length & width, (+/-)3
mm for Height (Thickness)
168
II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
7. Testing of Paver Blocks.
SR.NO * TEST
SPECIFICATION
Average Values
(Average Of Minimum
Five Samples/ Site )
Min. 50 N/sqmm for 100
mm thick
Min. 45 N/Sqmm for
80mm thick
Min. 35 N/Sqmm for
60 mm thick
1.
Compressive Strength
BS 6717
2.
Flexural Strength
Minimum 4.5 N/Sqmm
3.
Abrasion Resistance
Maximum 1.5
4.
Water Absorption
ASTM C 936
Maximum 5.00 %
5.
Minimum Cement Content
380 Kg/CuM
Visual Inspection: All units should be sound and free of defects .
Resistance to freezing & thawing : Concrete Pavers should have adequate
resistance to freezing and thawing. When tested in laboratory in accordance with
section 8 of method C67 of ISO-DIS-4108,specimens shall have no breakage and
loss in dry weight of any individual unit should not be more than 1.0% , when
subjected to 50 cycles of freezing and thawing . The test shall be conducted not
more than 12 months prior to delivery of units.
* Sampling and Testing Procedure As Per Enclosed Specifications
169
Sampling and Testing procedures for Paver Blocks
Sample size :
INTERNAL - Average of minimum 3 samples per 5000 Blocks
EXTERNAL - Minimum 2 Blocks per 10000 blocks . Average of minimum
8 blocks per site
1. Sampling For Testing
Sampling for testing of paver blocks shall be done in accordance with
Appendix-A.
2. Compressive Strength
Testing for compressive strength shall be undertaken in accordance with
Appendix-B. The average compressive strength of the blocks tested shall be
min. 50 N/Sqmm , min.45 N/Sqmm for 80 mm thick & min.35 N/sqmm for
60mm thick pavers.
3. Abrasion Resistance
Testing for abrasion shall be in accordance with IS 1237 (Specifications for
Cement Concrete Floor Tiles) - Appendix C.
4. Flexural Strength
Testing for flexural shall be in accordance with IS 1237 (Specifications
for Cement Concrete Floor Tiles) - Appendix D.
5. Water Absorption
Testing for water absorption shall be in accordance with IS 2185:1979 :Part 1(
Specifications for Concrete Masonry Units ) - Appendix E.
170
II.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
8.
LAYING OF PAVER BLOCKS.
8.1.1 PRIMING
The contactors are required to verify the existing WBM driveway surface and ascertain the
CBR value . Accordingly the total sub grade thickness required to achieve the desired CBR
value to be advised to HPCL within seven days of receipt of call-up . HPCL shall, through
regular vendors arrange to carryout such WBM, wherever required. Before taking over the sites
the Paver block laying party is required to verify the stabilization of the surface with CBR values
.
It will be the responsibility of the Paver block party to ensure that the Manholes/ Pipeline/ Cable
trenches / circular drainage system etc. raised to driveway level using the requisite materials as
per instruction of Engg In Charge (EIC) of HPCL . The areas of potholes /deep depressions at
the isolated locations also have to be filled up before laying the paver blocks. No extra payments
will be made for this purpose. The area of raised manholes shall be included in the
measurement of overall area of paver blocks for the purpose of payment.
It will be the responsibility of the contractors to ensure that udulations on the paver blocks are
eliminated after the traffic is allowed on it . Proper slope for draining of water needs to be
ensured by the contractor. All necessary materials , tools , tackles are required to be arranged
by the contractor.
8.1.2 BEDDING SAND COURSE
The bedding sand shall consist of a clean well graded sand passing through 4.75 mm sieve and
suitable to concrete manufacture .The bedding should be from either a single source or blended
to achieve the following grading.
IS SIEVE SIZE
% PASSING
9.52 mm
100
4.75 mm
95-100
2.36 mm
80-100
1.18 mm
50-100
600 microns
25-60
300 microns
10-30
150 microns
5-15
75 microns
0-10
______________________________________________________________________
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap-graded sands or sands
containing an excessive amount of fines or plastic fines are not used. The sand particles should
preferably be sharp not rounded , as sharp sand possess higher strength and resist the migration
171
of sand from under the block to less frequently areas. Even though sharp sands are relatively
more difficult to compact than rounded sands , the use of sharp sands is preferred for the more
heavily trafficked driveways. The sand use for bedding shall be free of any deletorious
soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence .
The sand shall be of uniform moisture content and within 4%-8% when spread and shall be
protected against rain when stockpiled prior to spreading . Saturated sand shall not be used.
The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a uniform layer as per drawing . The compacted
uniform thickness shall be of 50mm and within + 5mm .Thickness variation shall not be used
to correct irregularities in the base course surface .
The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and protected against precompaction both prior to and following screeding .Any pre-compacted sand or screeded sand
left overnight shall be loosened before further laying of paving units take place.
Sand shall be slightly screeded in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only slightly
ahead of the laying of the paving unit.
Any depressions in the screeded sand exceeding 5mm shall be loosened , raked and rescreeded
before laying of paving units .
8.1.3 LAYING OF INTERLOCKING PAVING UNITS :
Paving units shall be laid in herringbone laying pattern throughout the pavement. Once the
laying pattern has been established , it shall continue without interruption over the entire
pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the use of infill concrete or discontinuities in laying pattern
is not be permitted in other than approved locations .
Paving units shall be placed on the uncompacted screeded sand bed to the nominated laying
pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. The first row shall
be located next to an edge restraint. Specially manufactured edge paving units are permitted or
edge units may be cut using a power saw, a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster or other
approved cutting machine.
Paving units shall be placed to achieve gaps nominally 2 to 3mm wide between adjacent paving
joints. No joint shall be less than 1.5 mm nor more than 4mm. Frequent use of string lines shall
be used to check alignment. In this regard, the “laying face” shall be checked at least every two
metres as the face proceeds. Should the face become out of alignment, it must be corrected prior
to initial compaction and before further laying job is proceeded with .
In each row , all full units shall be laid first. Closure units shall be cut and fitted subsequently.
Such closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of a full unit.
To infill spaces between 25mm and 50mm wide, a concrete having 1:2:4 cement : sand :coarse
aggregate mix and a strength of 45 N/Sqmm shall be used. Within such mix the nominal
aggregate size shall not exceed one third the smallest dimension of the infill space. For smaller
spaces dry packed mortar shall be used.
172
Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying bond, the
paving units shall not be hammered into position. Where adjustment of position is necessary
care shall be taken to avoid premature compaction of the sand bedding.
8.1.4 INITIAL COMPACTION
After laying the paving units, they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand
bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two (2) passes of a suitable
plate compactor.
The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator having
plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve paving units.
Prior to compaction all debris shall be removed from the surface.
Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to any traffic.
Compaction shall not, however, be attempted within one metre of the laying face. Compaction
shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units. Joints shall then be
filled and recompacted as described in Clause 6.1.5.
All work further than one metre from the laying face shall be left fully compacted at the
completion of each day’s laying.
Any units that are structurally damaged prior to or during compaction shall be immediately
removed and replaced .
Sufficient plate compactors shall be maintained at the paving site for both bedding compaction
and joint filling.
8.1.5 JOINT FILLING AND FINAL COMPACTION
As soon as practical after compaction and in any case prior to the termination of work on that
day and prior to the acceptance of construction traffic, sand for joint filling shall be spread over
the pavement.
Joint sand shall pass a 2.36 mm (No 8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts or contaminants
likely to cause efflorescence. The sane shall comply with the following grading limits:
173
IS SIEVE SIZE
% PASSING
2.36 mm
100
1.18 mm
90-100
600 microns
60-90
300 microns
30-60
150 microns
15-30
75 microns
10-20
______________________________________________________________________
The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used in the contract prior to
delivering any such material to site for incorporation into the works. Certificates of test results
issued by a recognised testing laboratory confirming that the samples conform to the
requirements of this specification shall accompany the sample .
The jointing sand shall be broomed to fill the joints. Excess sand shall then be removed from the
pavement surface and the jointing sand shall be compacted with not less than one (1) pass the the
plate vibrator and joints refilled with sand to full depth. This procedure shall be repeated until all
joints are completely filled with sand. No traffic shall be permitted to use the pavement until all
joints have been completely filled with sand and compacted.
Both the sand and paving units shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed into the joints to
prevent premature setting of the sand.
The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent units shall not exceed 3mm with not more
than 1% in any 3m x 3m area exceeding 2mm. Pavements which is deformed beyond above
limits after final compaction , shall be taken out and reconstructed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - ------------
8.1.6 Edge Restraint
Edge restraints need to be sufficiently robust to withstand override by the anticipated traffic, to
withstand thermal expansion and to prevent loss of the laying course material from beneath the
surface course. The edge restraint should present a vertical face down to the level of the
underside of the laying course.
The surface course should not be vibrated until the edge restraint, together with any bedding or
concrete launching, has gained sufficient strength. It is essential that edge restraints are
adequately secured.
174
II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9. Laying Patterns.
Details of laying pattern should be specified before commencement of laying.
175
Appendix -A
Sampling of Paver blocks.
1.
Method of sampling
Before laying paver blocks, each designated section comprising not more than
50000 blocks, shall be divided into ten approximately equal groups. Three
blocks shall be drawn from each group.
2.
Marking and Identification
All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that
the designated section of part thereof, and the consignment represented by the
sample, are clearly defined.
The sample shall be dispatched to the approved test laboratory taking
precaution to avoid damage to the paving in transit. Protect the paving from
damage and contamination until they have been tested. The testing shall be
carried as soon as possible, after the sample has been taken. As soon as
practicable after sampling. The samples shall be stored in water at 20 degree
C  5 degree C for 24 hours prior to testing.
176
APPENDIX – B
Procedure for Testing of Compressive Strength of Paver Blocks.
Reference : BS 6717 Part-I (1993) Specification for Paving Blocks
B.1 TESTING MACHINE : The testing machines shall be of suitable capacity for the test
and capable of applying the load at the rate specified. It shall comply, as regards repeatability
and accuracy with the requirements of relevant ISI specs.
B.2 PROCEDURE : The sample specimens shall be tested in wet condition after being stored
for at least 24 hours, in water maintained at a temperature of 20 degrees C5 degrees C. before
the specimens are submerged in water, the necessary area shall be determined by the method
described in Appendix A .
The plates of the testing machine shall be wiped clean and any loose grit or other material
removed from the contact faces of the specimen. Plywood nominally 4mm thick, shall be used
as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen and the machine plates, and
these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a margin of at least 5mm at all points. Fresh
packing shall be used for each specimen tested. The specimen shall be placed in the machine
with the wearing surface in a horizontal plane and in such away that the axes of the specimen
are aligned with those of the machine plates. The load shall be applied without shock and
increased continuously at the rate of Approximately 15 N/sqmm per minute until no greater load
can be sustained. The maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded.
B.3 CALCULATION OF CORRECTED STRENGTH : The compressive strength of
each block specimen shall be calculated by dividing the maximum load by full cross section area
and multiplying by an appropriate factors.
Thickness And Chamfer Correction Factors
For Compressive Strength
Work Size Thickness in mm
60
80
100
Correction Factors
Plain block
1.00
1.12
1.18
B.4 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CALCULATION
Chamfered block
1.06
1.18
1.24
:
The average corrected
compressive strength for the designated block section shall be calculated.
177
APPENDIX - C
Method for Determining of Wet Transverse Strength
( Flexural Strength )
1.
The pavers shall be tested wet after soaking in water for 24 hours.
2.
The specimen shall be placed horizontally on two parallel steel supports, with wearing surface
upwards and its sides parallel to the supports. At least one of the supports shall be self-adjusting.
3.
The load shall be applied by means of a steel rod parallel to the supports and mid way between
them.
4.
Plywood padding about 3mm thick and 20mm wide shall be placed between the paver and each
of the supports and between the paver and the steel rod.
5.
The load shall be applied gradually and at a uniform rate.
6.
The load ‘P’ which caused the breaking of the paver shall be recorded.
7.
The wet transverse strength ‘F’ shall be calculated as follows:
F=3PL / 2BT
Where,
P- breaking load in N,
L- span between supports in mm,
B- with of the paver in mm,
T- thickness of the paver in mm.
8.
The average wet transverse strength shall be reported.
178
APPENDIX – D
Method for Determining of Resistance to wear
(Abrasion Resistance)
The grinding path of the disc of the abrasion-testing machine shall be event strewn with 20 g. of
the abrasive powder. The specimen shall than be fixed in the holding device with the surface to be
ground facing the disc, and loaded at the center with 300N (30’kgf). The grinding disc shall than
be up in motion at a speed of 30 rev/min and the abrasive powder is continuously fed back on to
the grinding pat so that it remains uniformly distributed in a track corresponding to the width of
the test piece. After every 22 revolutions, the disc shall be stopped the abraded tile powder and
the remainder of the abrasive powder shall be removed from the disc, and fresh abrasive powder
in quantities of 20g applied each time. After every 22 revolutions the specimen shall be turned
about the vertical axis through an angle of 90 in the clockwise direction and it should be repeated
9 times thereby giving total number of revolutions of 220. the disc, the abrasive powder and the
specimen shall be kept dry throughout the duration of the test. After the abrasion is over, the
specimen shall be reweighed to the nearest 0.1 g. it shall then be placed in the thickness
measuring apparatus once again in an identical manner and the reading taken with the same
position and setting of the dial gauge as for the measurement before abrasion.
The wear shall be determined from the difference in readings obtained by the measuring
instrument before and the abrasion of the specimen. The value shall be checked up with the
average loss in thickness of the specimen obtained by the following formula.
T = ( W1-W2) V1
W1 X A
Where,
T = average loss in thickness in mm,
W = initial mass of specimen in g,
W = final mass of abraded specimen g,
V = initial volume of specimen in mm
A = surface area of the specimen in mm
179
APPENDIX – E
Method for the determination of water Absorption
1.
The test specimens shall be completely immersed in water at room temperature for 24
hours.
2.
The specimens shall then be weighed, while suspended by a metal wire and completely
submerged in water.
3.
They shall be removed from the water and allowed to drain for one minute.
4.
Visible surfaces water being removed with a damp cloth , and immediately weighed.
5. Subsequent to saturation, all specimens shall be dried in a ventilated oven at 100 to 115 C for
not less than 24 hours and until two successive weighting at intervals of 2 hours show an
increment of loss not greater than 0.2 percent of the last previously determined mass of the
specimen.
6.
Calculate the absorption as follows:
Absorption, kg/m = A – B X 1000
A-C
Absorption, percent = A –B X 100
B
Where,
A = wet mass of unit in kg,
B = dry mass of unit in kg, and
C = suspended immersed mass of unit in kg.
180
TECHNICAL – SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SUPPLY , FABRICATION & INSTALLATION
OF
PREFAB CANOPIES
181
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION : PREFABRICATED CANOPIES
Section (01) : SCOPE:
Designing, prefabrication off-site, supplying at site and erecting in position Pre-fabricated
Canopies for Retail outlets. Canopies shall consist of Pre-Fabricated steel structural framing
for primary and secondary construction for roof and columns, Concealed fixed roofing system,
interlocking type metal false ceiling system , Gutter and downtake assembly complete with all
the accessories and assemblies required to construct the canopies at retail outlets of HPCL . All
structurals shall be supplied in Pre-fabricated condition for field assembly and no hot works shall
be done at sites except for minor connections. Works have to be carried out at working retail
outlets without causing any major disruption of operations. All safety precautions to be
observed strictly.
Assembly and Erection of all the elements of the canopy described as below and providing the
foundations for canopy columns are included in the scope of works.
Section (02) : CANOPY DESCRIPTION
Usage
:
To provide top cover on driveway / filling bay at
Retail Outlets .
Quantity of Identical Canopies
:
Each canopy may be different
Min. Clear Height under the ceiling
:
4.50 M
Max Clear Height under the ceiling
:
6.00 M
No. of columns
Max column Spacing (C/C)
:
:
Variable as per HPCL’s decision for each site.
12.00 M
Max Cantilever (in all directions)
:
5.00 M
Acceptable Roof Slope
:
To accommodate facia height of 760/600 mm all
sides for canopies more than 150 sqm and 450 mm
for Canopies less than 150 sqm as approved by
HPCL before fabrication.
Column Type
:
Structural sections and MS plates conforming IS
2062.
General features of the canopy
182
Roof Structure
: a) Rafters and Purlins: Made of combination of Structural
steel conforming to IS 2062 or tubular steel IS 1161.
Footing and Foundations
:
Footings and foundations shall be in 1%(Basis cross
Sectional area of members) minimum re-inforcement for
M-20 concrete RCC 1:1 1/2:3 mix to support steel
columns and the
canopy.
The
works
includes
excavation, soling 9” tk., PCC-6”tk. 1:4:8, back filling
etc., Payment for this item will be made only based on
volume of RCC designed and provided.
Special Provisions
a)
Electrical fittings: Installation of Lighting, Speakers etc.
To be integrated in the ceilings and suspended
from the
Roof Structure by the contractor. Fittings
shall be
supplied by party only. Specification and make / model
mentioned under item no Section 4.G to be followed .
Approx. No. of fittings are:
No. of lights - 1 per 10 sqm.Maximum( Norm of 1 per 15
sqm OR 1 per 20 sqm , can also be adopted Depending
upon the site condition . ) No. of speaker (supplied by
HPCL) - 1 per 100 sqm..
b)
Supplying and carrying out wiring for canopy lighting
using 3 x 2.5 sqmm PVC unarmoured cable in PVC
conduits. Job also includes supply and fixing in position
of 25mm dia PVC heavy duty conduit pipes with joineries
for the cables and
suitable circuit breakers all
complete . The lighting scheme for the canopy lights shall
be done in such a manner that switching on the
alternate light fittings in a row is possible , if required
during off-peak hours .
c)
Blanking sheet on non illuminated side of the canopy shall
be provided using 0.8 mm thick RMP coated sheet of
same shade as of false ceiling . The sheet shall be
provided in such a manner as to prevent water ingress
completely.
d)
The gap between the glow box and the roof shall be
covered in such a manner using 0.8 mm RMP coated sheet
or using false ceiling material , so that water ingress do
not take place .
183
Section (03)
: DESIGN CODES
All the canopies shall be designed in accordance with applicable IS codes for fabrication,
physical loading, erection following design loads shall be considered.
Roof live load
:
0.75 KN / SqM. (as per IS 875 Part-2)
Wind Speed
:
Min. 150 Km/Hr or As per IS 875 Part 3-1987 (Latest
Revision) ,whichever is higher For coastal zones , prone to
higher wind velocity , min. Wind speed of 220 Km/Hr or as
per IS 875 whichever is higher . Necessary roof bracings and
structurals to be used to stabilise canopy movement and to
avoid any deflection. Deflcetion in any member is not
permitted .
Collateral Loads
:
0.10 KN / SqM
Loads for Glow Facia
:
40 Kg/M all around the canopy.
Minimum weight of canopy
:
30 Kg / SqM
Section (04)
: DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS OF MATERIALS
4(A) Structurals
4.A.1 . Primary Framing
Primary Framing shall include columns and rafters. All the elements of the primary framing
shall be designed, engineered and supplied to site in factory finished ready to use condition,
manufactured out of minimum 240 Mpa hot rolled steel plates and sections conforming to IS
2062. All the elements of the roof and column structurals shall be supplied with pre-drilled ,
pre-punched and pre-weld condition and no hot works or fabrication at site shall be allowed.
Provision for cable conduiting and downtake assembly shall be made. Steel used shall be from
SAIL / TISCO / IISCO / VSPL/JINDAL only . Necessary proof of the same shall be submitted .
4.A.2. Secondary Framing
Rafters and purlins shall be of MS conforming to IS 2062 . All other specification for these
items shall be as per 4.A.1 only .
For , 4.A.1 & 4.A.2 , all hot rolled members shall conform to IS 2062 or BS EN 10025- S
275.All built up sections shall conform to IS 8500 or ASTm A 572 or BSEN 10025 S 355 .All
cold rolled sections such as purlins , side girts etc. shall be of Grade 50 Steel or equivalent and
galvanised .
184
4.A.Connection Bolts and Anchor Bolts
These shall be procured from M/s. GKW, TVS or from an equivalent source approved by HPCL
Bolts for main structural connections are grade 8.8 /equivalent . Bolts for bracings , purlins,
girts etc. are grade 4.6 / equivalent .
Anchor Bolts:
Foundation bolts shall be anchor bolts of suitable size and length and made from steel of
grade 8.8 or equivalent.
These shall be supplied as per the required designs and shall be manufactured out of IS 2062
steel solid bars with threading on the top side. One set of nut and washer shall be supplied along
with anchor bolts and fixed. Party to issue material test and quality certificate regarding
confirmation that it conforms to the specification mentioned above.
4.A.4 Painting System
All the column and roof structurals shall be supplied with factory applied one coat of Zinc
Chromate Red Oxide primer. Additional two coats of zinc-chromate primer and 2 coats of
enamel paint of approved colour and shade , shall be applied at site for metal surfaces.
Necessary manual surface preparation to be carried out before primer application. Approved
makes of primers and paints are Berger / Asian Paints /ICI /J. Nicholson .
4.B Coverings:
4.B.1 Roofing System:
Roofing base material should be of cold rolled steel of 0.55 mm thick and conform to ASTM:A
446 having yield stress of 275 MPA . The coating should be Aluminium and Zinc alloy
comprising 55% Al , 43.5 Zinc & 1.5 % Silicon , as per ASTM :A 792 . The coating mass
should not be less than 150 Gms per SqM (total of both sides). For , bare galvalume, TCT
should not be less than 0.55 mm .
Sheets shall have approved side laps with top sheets facing away from the prevailing weather.
Necessary profiled filler box should be provided at higher level of roof sheeting and at
valley gutter to ensure water tightness in the profiled gaps . The fixing of roofing shall be
done in such a manner that the roof is not drilled / punctured for fixing with the purlins .
HPCL approved make for roofing system are Interarch , Lloyd Steel, Hunter Douglas,
,Metcraft & Tiger Steel or approved equivalent. The approved equivalent makes will be those
only which are approved by HPCL. Any delay in obtaining this approval will be on contractor’s
account and no extension of time in this account will be considered.
185
4.B.2 Flashings, Cappings and trims:
These shall be formed out of same substrates as that of the roofing sheets and shall be supplied
in standard lengths of 2.5 M in the required shapes and girths and fixed by means of hex-head
mechanically galvanised stitching screws. Silicon sealent non-hardening neutral cure type shall
be applied at all laps to avoid water seepage .
.
4.B.3 Gutters:
These shall be formed out of 20 gauge GI sheets or more thick ( if required for proper sealing)
and shall be supplied in standard lengths of 2.5 M in the required shapes and girths with end
caps, straps assembled with proper joint pieces rivetted and sealed with Silicon Sealant or
better material and to provide the GI sleeves for water flow through down take pipes . It
shall be fixed by means of M6 galvanised stitching bolts . Silicon sealent , non-hardening
neutral cure type shall be provided on all laps.
C Downtake Assembly:
PVC pipes 150mm diameter, 4kg/cm2 shall be used complete with compatible downspouts and
elbows at terminating ends. Silicon sealent shall be applied at all junctions of the assembly. The
discharge of rain water shall not be done on the driveway near the islands .
D. Metal Ceiling System: (150 mm wide or 200 mm wide )
Metal Ceiling System shall comprise of exterior grade Interlocking Ceiling panels, Carriers,
Suspension System and edge closure flashing as per the following specifications:
Supplying and installation of 150 F /200 F ceiling system (exterior grade) comprising of 150
mm x 17mm deep panes, roll formed out of 0.5 mm thick pre-coated galvanised steel.(base
steel 240 Mpa yield strength and coated with zinc in a min. Thickness of 180 gms per sqm total
of both sides). The sheet material should be sourced from original manufacturer / through
authorised import agents only.
The panels shall be degreased , pretreated and pre-coated on one side in manufacturer’s standard
colour shade(matching the shade of luminaire cover ) min. 20 micron , on the exposed surface .
The rear side of the panels shall be given a coat of primer and a wash coat while the finished
side shall be given a coat of primer and finish colour coat in polyster paint for a min dry film
thickness of 20 microns .
Fixing arrangement shall be on to the roll formed carriers 34.5 mm x 48 mm deep out of
0.6mm thick galvanised steel with prongs to hold panels in a module of 150mm at maximum 1.2
mtrs c/c. The carriers to be suspended from roof truss by rigid suspension rods with special
height adjustment spring steel clips at maximum 1.2 mtrs c/c. Hangers to be fixed to the roof by
“J” hooks and nylon inserts as per manufacturers recommendation. Panels shall be supplied in
custom length upto max. of 5 mtrs. Job also includes providing ceiling flashing using factory
formed 0.5mm thick polyester coated galvalume steel material or of the false ceiling
186
material . False ceiling material with panel widths of upto 200 mm is also acceptable ,as
approved by site EIC .
HPCL approved make for metal ceiling system are Interarch , Luxalon( Hunter Douglas)
,Metcraft ,Conwed Enterprises & Tiger Steel or approved equivalent. The approved equivalent
makes will be those only which are approved by HPCL. Any delay in obtaining this approval
will be on contractor’s account and no extension of time in this account will be considered.
E. Foundations:
Footing and foundations shall be designed and provided as per the requirements of the steel
columns and soil condition. Soil test to be carried out by the contractor. Concrete mix shall be
RCC 1:2:4 by volume, with steel reinforcement of 1% (MINIMUM) of cross-sectional area. The
job includes excavation, soling, PCC, back filling etc. Payment will be made based on volume
of RCC provided.
Quantity of RCC being considered for evaluation of the tender will be 3 CUM per
Column.(approx)
The no. of columns given is only indicative and actual requirement will be decided at site based
on site conditions and design.
Design of foundations have to be approved by HPCL before starting the job.
F. Luminaires - Supply and fixing :Bajaj make model no. BJPP 150W MHDE-CA fittings or Wipro make model no. WHH
96150 or Crompton make FADR1107/15 CCA or Philips make ( only after written approval
from HPCL of specific model no.)with Osram / Philips / Bajaj make lamps are to be provided
, meeting following specification .
G.1.1 Integral 150/250 Watt Metal Halide Luminaire : - Integral totally enclosed low/midbay
luminaire with super high purity hammered finish anodised aluminium reflector and side
mounted control gera suitable for 1 x 150 /1*250W watt metal halide lamp (double ended ).
Integral Recess Mounted totally enclosed (IP 65) under canopy midbay luminaire suitable for
150 W double ended tubular metal halide lamp fitted using ceramic RX 7s-24 lamp holder
with silver plated SS contact. The housing to be constructed in die cast Al alloy with heat
dissipation arrangements , finished in high quality stove enamel white of shade matching to
metal false ceiling . The housing to have accessories like impulser type ignitor, low
temperature rise heavy duty copper wound inductive MHL ballast duly wired with highheat/voltage resistant XLPE insulated Cu wire with Loop-in Loop-out arrangement mounted
on removable tray for easy maintenance .
The optical controller should be precisely designed and tooled up for wide beam spread
and high vertical illumination constructed in high efficiency bright hammered finish preanodised aluminium reflector .
187
Lamp and controlgear compartment should have separate hingable die-cast frames (lamp
compartment frame sealed with toughened glass ) fitted to housing using eight numbers of
special anti-magnetic stainless steel loss proof screws and SS compression springs for
hinging. The luminaire should have facility for 4 point suspension using suitable suspenders
Silicon gasket to be used for avoiding ingress of moisture and longevity .
G.1.2 Lamps 150 /250Watt Metal Halide :The lamp should be 150/250 W double ended metal halide lamp of day light colour .
Section (0 5) : SUBMITTALS
The successful bidder shall submit the following along with each supply at appropriate stages to
EIC .
A. Manufacturers’test certificate for structural steel, roofing ,ceilings and luminaries .
B. Guarantee for roofing = 20 years as life to first maintenance.
C. Guarantee for Ceiling =10 years as life to first maintenance.
D. Guarantee against leakage = 12 months from the date of completion of works.
E. Stability certificate for canopy structure from licensed Structural Engineer.
F. Structural & Foundation design calculations duly verified from licensed
Structural/civil Engineer.
G. Shop drawings for :
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Canopy structure.
Canopy column foundations.
Roofing System
Ceiling System
Guttering and Down take assembly.
H. Foundation drawing.
188
(7)
FORMAT FOR SUBMITTING AFFIDAVIT BY THE PARTY
(To be submitted on Rs 100 /- Stamp paper for each site alongwith Final Bill )
From
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
To,
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited
________________ Regional Office
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
Sub : Canopy at ___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
I , _______________________________ , son/daughter of __________________________
residing at ________________________________________________________________ ,
Proprietor / Director of M/s ___________________________________________________ ,
(the Firm/Company ) is authorised to sign this affidavit and undertaking on behalf of the
Firm/Company . I , do hereby , solemnly affirm and declare as under :-
1. That we have completed the job under PO no. _____________ dated ___________
at the above mentioned Retail Outlet location .
2. That the canopy shall meet following performance criteria :-
2.1 Roofing shall not leak upto 20 years from the date of installation .
189
2.2 False Ceiling shall be free of defect upto 10 years from the date of installation ie upto
_______________, ______
FORMAT FOR SUBMITTING AFFIDAVIT BY THE PARTY
2.3 Leakage through any part of canopy shall not take place till 12 months from the date of
installation of canopy ie till __________________ , _________ .
3. Should any of the above occur , I shall arrange for rectification of the same free of cost .
4. In case I cannot carry out the rectification job , within one month of the letter from
HPCL Regional Office , HPCL reserves the right to carryout the job through other
contractors at my risk and cost .
Dated at
this
of
Very truly yours ,
( Signature and Seal )
Witness 1:____________________
Name and address
Witness 2:____________________
Name and address
Name (Block Letter) ______________________
Address _______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
________________________________________________________________________
190
SECTION IV
LIST OF APPROVED BRANDS /MAKES
191
LIST OF APPROVED MAKE / BRAND FOR CIVIL WORKS
S. No.
1
2
3
NAME OF MATERIAL
Cement
APPROVED MAKE
L & T, Birla, RAMCO, CCI, ACC
Reinforcement Steel / Structural
TISCO, SAIL, TSRM, VIZAG STEEL
steel
Johnson / Kajaria / Somany /
Glazed Tile
Nitco/Regency
4
Ceramic tile
Johnson / Spartek / Kajaria
5
Polished vitrified ceramic tile
Marbogranite / Nitco / H & R Jhonson
6
Plywood
National / Kit ply / Green ply
7
Lamination
Decolam / Green lam
8
Aluminium door / window
Windows & doors using Jindal / Indal
sections as per detailed specifications.
9
Floor spring / door closer
Everite / hardwin
10
Acrylic
emulsion
paints
/
Johnson & Nicholson / Garware / Berger
Distempers / synthetic enamel
/ Asian paints
paint
11
Cement paint
Snow cem / Asian paint / Berger / Nitco
12
Glazing / glass
Indo - asia / Modi float / Saint Gobain
13
Paver block
Designer pavings / Vibrant besser / Aeons
/ Hicon / Malu / Prathi sai / shan Fly
ash/ Nitco or any other meeting our
specifications as per attachment.
14
Roofing sheet for canopy
Inter arch / Tiger steel / Intersil Metallic
products /Conwed /Metcraft
False ceiling material for canopy
Inter arch / Tiger steel / Luxalon / Intersil
Metallic products (Conwed) / Kirbi /
metcraft
15
192
16
17
Water closet / wash basin /
urinal / flushing cistern / WC
cover/Sinks
CP brass fittings like bib cock,
stop cock, pillar cock, bottle trap
etc.,
Hindustan sanitaryware / parryware /
neycer
Jaquar / Metro / Parko / Essco /
waterman
18
PVC pipe
Supreme / Prince / Finolex
19
GI pipe / MS pipe
Tata / Zenith / GST / Jindal
20
Gun metal gate valve / check
Leader / GG (ISI marked)
valve
21
PVC water tank
22
Soap Tray
23
Locks
Note :
Sintex
Hindustan/Parryware/Neyeer
Godrej
Regarding selecting the make against each item among the approved makes as
specified above, decision of HPCL shall be final.
193
LIST OF APPROVED MAKE / BRAND FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
S. No.
NAME OF MATERIAL
APPROVED MAKE
1
MCCB
L&T
2
SFU / FSU / HRC fuses / MCCB
3
MCB Distribution Boards
MDS / Havells / Standard Electricals
Ltd., / Hager / MK SENTRY
4
MCB/ELCB
MDS/Havells/Standard Electricals Ltd.,
/Hager/MK SENTRY
5
PVC Conduits and accessories
6
PVC insulated copper wire
7
Switch / Sockets
8
Angle holder / batten holder / ceiling
rose
9
TV / telephone socket
Anchor Roma / Mk India / Legrand
10
Telephone wire / cable
BSNL approved make
11
LT cables
12
Light fittings / ballast / lamps
13
Ceiling fans (double ball bearing)
Crompton / Usha / Khaitan / Bajaj
14
Exhaust fans
Crompton / Usha / Khaitan / Bajaj
15
Emergency light
16
KWH meter
17
Ammeter / Voltmeter
18
Indicating lamps (LED type)
19
GI pipes / MS pipe
L & T / Havells / Alsthom / standard
ISI/FIA approved make
V plast / Finolex
Anchor Roma / Mk India / Legrand
Anchor
CCI / UNIVERSAL / NICCO / FINOLEX /
GLOWSTAR / OMEGA
PHILIPS / BAJAJ / CROMPTON/WIPRO
BPL
BHEL / SIMCO / India Meter
L & T / AE / IMP / MECO
L&T, Cromplem Greaves, Philips
Jindal / GST / Tata / Zenith
194
20
Street light poles
21
Change Over Switch
22
Capacitors
Note :
Bombay poles or ISI approved make.
LT / Siemens / Havells
Universal / Asian
Regarding selecting the make against each item among the approved makes as
specified above, decision of HPCL shall be final
195
SECTION V
STANDARD
DRAWINGS
196
BASE
RATE
ATTACHMENT
197
198